Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Changes In Branch tip518-event-last-child-unmanaged Excluding Merge-Ins
This is equivalent to a diff from 60230550 to 03c7d3df
2018-11-06
| ||
15:07 | Implement TIP 518 check-in: b82676d5 user: dkf tags: trunk | |
14:40 | Tidy up tests Closed-Leaf check-in: 03c7d3df user: dkf tags: tip518-event-last-child-unmanaged | |
2018-10-30
| ||
22:55 | Add tests for the 'propagate off' case of pack and grid check-in: 2058b166 user: fvogel tags: tip518-event-last-child-unmanaged | |
2018-09-22
| ||
19:10 | Update to implement TIP518 event name change check-in: 23815eb1 user: oehhar tags: tip518-event-last-child-unmanaged | |
2016-09-21
| ||
06:32 | (Modernized) patch from egavilan to fix [2863003fff] and [d6b95ce492] - tk frame does not shrink to 0 height if last children unpacked. A virtual event is sent when the pack or grid geometry manager leaves a parent without any slaves Leaf check-in: 60230550 user: fvogel tags: bug-d6b95ce492, rfe-2863003fff | |
2016-09-10
| ||
09:07 | Fixed [eb26817783] - listbox-13.3 fails on Linux check-in: faa07d44 user: fvogel tags: core-8-6-branch | |
Added .fossil-settings/crlf-glob.
|
Changes to .fossil-settings/crnl-glob.
| 1 2 | - - - - - + + - |
|
Changes to .fossil-settings/encoding-glob.
1 | 1 2 3 | - - - | win/buildall.vc.bat |
Changes to .fossil-settings/ignore-glob.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | + + + + + + | *.a *.dll *.dylib *.exe *.exp *.lib *.o *.obj *.pdb *.res *.sl *.so */Makefile */config.cache */config.log */config.status */tkConfig.sh */wish* */tktest* */versions.vc doc/man.macros win/Debug* win/Release* win/nmhlp-out.txt win/nmakehlp.out unix/tk.pc html/* |
Changes to .project.
1 2 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | - + | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> |
︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2002.
︙ | |||
2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 | 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 | - + | Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it was redundant. * unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of inputContext to null. * win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build |
︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2004.
︙ | |||
807 808 809 810 811 812 813 | 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 | - + | * doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the default canvas origin. [Bug 956681] 2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <[email protected]> * generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified |
︙ |
Changes to README.
1 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | - + - + - + | README: Tk |
︙ |
Changes to changes.
︙ | |||
1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 | 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 | - + | canvases) so that it correctly prints all of the characters in the ISO Latin-1 character set. 2/19/94 (bug fix) Modified tkBind.c to save and restore the interpreter's result across the execution of binding scripts. Otherwise if an event triggers in the middle of some other script (e.g. a destroy event during window creation, because there was an error in the creation command), |
︙ | |||
5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 | 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 | - + | correctly. (hobbs) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) fixed tk_chooseDirectory crash on Win95. (baker) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) removed 2 second 'raise' delay seen by some Unix window managers. (hobbs, baker) |
︙ | |||
7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 | 7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335 7336 7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 7399 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 7426 7427 7428 7429 7430 7431 7432 7433 7434 7435 7436 7437 7438 7439 7440 7441 7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 7518 7519 7520 7521 7522 7523 7524 7525 7526 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | 2016-07-15 (bug) Aqua/Retina: fix alpha rendering of images (culler,walzer) 2016-07-17 (bug)[c84f66] Aqua: crash: overflow in geometry calc (culler,walzer) 2016-07-21 (bug)[450bb0] Aqua: memory corruption from [tk busy] (porter) --- Released 8.6.6, July 27, 2016 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tk/ for details 2016-08-23 (bug)[a2abc4] Wrong warp cursor position on 2nd display (vogel) 2016-08-29 (bug)[fa3229] menu-38.1 (calvo,vogel) 2016-08-29 (bug)[2cf3d6] button-5.24 (vogel) 2016-09-04 (bug)[1534455,2945130] Key release events get _L vs _R right. (vogel) 2016-09-10 (bug)[8c4216] listbox-4.1 (vogel) 2016-09-10 (bug)[eb2681] listbox-13.1 (vogel) 2016-09-21 (bug)[3126428] ttk::button react to image change (thoyts) 2016-10-09 (bug)[1082213] wrapped text don't start lines with whitespace (vogel) 2016-10-12 (bug)[3217462] tri-state button on non-native theme (vogel) 2016-10-30 (bug)[3588460] Fix file dialog -typevariable (vogel) 2016-11-01 (bug)[e36963] event generate .e <diaeresis> (matthias,vogel) 2016-11-05 (bug)[6aea69] grid-23 (danckaert,vogel) 2016-11-18 (bug)[f60c54] combobox-3 (panza,vogel) 2017-01-03 (bug)[f32502] crash drawing many dashed objects (reithofer,werner) 2017-01-05 (bug)[dac92f] text-2.[89] (vogel) 2017-01-07 (bug)[3df559] OSX: Negative bbox width (vogel) 2017-01-07 (bug)[28a453] OSX: text widget index OBOE (vogel) 2017-01-07 (bug)[c12af7] OSX: text-21.1 (vogel) 2017-01-08 (bug)[7a838c] X11 ring buffer overflow (werner) 2017-01-11 (bug)[d4fb4e] imgPhoto-4.75 (nijtmans) 2017-01-18 (bug)[fab5fe] OSX: repair textDisp failures (vogel) 2017-01-23 (bug)[89a638] OSX: textDisp-15.8 (vogel) 2017-01-25 (bug)[1403ea] Limits on text line size on Windows (spjuth) 2017-02-05 (bug)[ae32eb] textDisp fails in text custom config (vogel) 2017-02-05 (bug)[7d967c] crash after IME restart (lanam,nijtmans) 2017-02-22 (bug)[c492c9] disabled combobox arrow appearance (danckaert) 2017-03-06 (bug)[6b3644] Fix -alpha for 16-bit color PNG (LemonMan) 2017-03-11 (bug)[775273] artifacts on Ubuntu 16.10+ (nemethi) 2017-03-26 (TIP 464) Win multimedia keys support (fassel,vogel) 2017-03-29 (bug)[28a3c3] test BTree memleaks plugged (anonymous) 2017-04-06 (bug)[db8c54] Stop freed mem access in warp pointer callback (porter) 2017-04-07 (bugs) Fix calculation of ttk::notebook tab widths (vogel) 2017-04-07 (bug)[291296] notebook tab management (decoster) 2017-04-08 (bug)[f0188a] Win reject invalid hex color codes (bachmann) 2017-04-10 (bug)[3f323b] variable struct size on XCode 8.3.1 (auriocus) 2017-04-20 (bug)[061bf9] OSX scrollbar draw position (reincke,walzer,joye) 2017-05-01 (bug) restore -initialfile for OSX file dialogs (reincke,gollwitzer) 2017-05-06 (bug) OSX file dialog type filters (walzer) 2017-05-10 (bug)[a5ba1c] race condition on Win clipboard cleanup (donchenko) 2017-05-18 (bug)[2433781] center image on button (cramer) 2017-05-19 (bug)[434d29] type mismatch with recent Xft (nijtmans,werner) 2017-06-02 (bug)[bc43fd] paneconfigure get pane heights right (vogel) 2017-06-21 (bug)[adc028] menu avoid unreleasable global grab (nash) 2017-06-30 (bug)[92e028,c5eb90] User switch forced theme reset (lanam) 2017-06-30 (bug)[62c5b7] segfault in [text] replace (werner) 2017-07-03 (bug)[8afc6c] OSX crash in save/open dialogs (simpson,walzer) 2017-08-02 (bug)[b601ce] Resource exhaustion processing corrupt GIF (nash) 2017-08-03 (bug)[9eab54] Fix -initialdir for OSX file dialogs (gollwitzer) 2017-08-08 (bug)[28d0b8] Follow ICCCM advice on X selection protocol (donchenko) 2017-08-08 (bug)[4966ca] Scidb race in notebook tab selection (cramer) --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tk/ for details 2017-08-24 (bug)[f1a3ca] Memory leak in [text] B-tree (edhume3) 2017-08-24 (bug)[ee40fd] Report [console] init errors (the) 2017-08-24 (bug)[3295446] Improve history visibility in [console] (goth) 2017-08-24 (bug) canvas closed polylines fully honor -joinstyle (vogel) 2017-08-24 (bug)[cc42cc] out of mem crash in tests imgPhoto-18.* (vogel) 2017-09-16 (bug)[3406785] fix coords rounding when drawing canvas items (vogel) 2017-09-24 (bug)[8277e1] linux fontchooser sync with available fonts (vogel) 2017-09-24 (bug)[5239fd] Segfault copying a photo image to itself (bachmann) 2017-09-24 (bug)[514ff6] canvas rotated text overlap detection (vogel) 2017-09-24 (bug)[1e0db2] canvas rchars artifacts (bruchie,vogel) 2017-10-07 (bug)[d9fdfa] display of Long non-wrapped lines in text (cramer) 2017-10-07 (bug)[dd9667] text anchor not set (vogel) 2017-10-11 (bugs) memleaks and other changes for macOS 10.13 support (culler) 2017-10-11 (bug)[111de2] macOS colorspace improvement (walzer,culler) 2017-10-13 (bug) macOS scrolling issues (culler) 2017-10-15 (bug) clipping regions in scrolling and drawing on macOS (culler) 2017-10-15 (bug) macOS redraw artifacts (culler) 2017-10-22 (bug)[bb6b40] ::tk::AmpMenuArgs and 'entryconf' (vogel) 2017-10-22 (bug)[55b95f] Crash [scale] with a bignum value (vogel) 2017-10-28 (bug)[ce62c8] text-37.1 fails (vogel) 2017-11-03 (bug)[0ef1c5] OS X - tests menu-22.[345] hang (vogel) 2017-11-04 (bug)[c8c52b] repair OBOE in menu.test on macOS (vogel) 2017-11-11 (feature) Implement [wm_iconphoto] on macOS (walzer) 2017-11-11 (bug) display of embedded toplevels (culler) 2017-11-19 (bug)[73ba07] Correct property type for MULTIPLE conversion (dpb) 2017-11-20 (bug) Memory leak in tkImgPhoto.c. (werner) 2017-11-21 (bug) Defeat zombie toplevels (culler) 2017-11-25 (bug) macOS resposive menu bar for command line apps (culler) 2017-11-25 (bug)[1c659e] support png from mac screenshots (vogel) 2017-11-25 (bug)[de4af1] macOS file selector "all types" setting (culler) 2017-11-26 (bug) [wm withdraw] on Window and Dock menus (walzer) 2017-11-27 (feature) Drop support for macOS 10.5 (culler) 2017-11-30 (bug)[164c1b] Fixes [raise] on macOS (culler) 2017-11-30 (bug)[13d63d] macOS support of menu -postcommand (culler) 2017-12-05 (bug) enable custom icon display on macOS (walzer) 2017-12-05 (bug)[1088805,0feb63] macOS bind failures (culler) 2017-12-05 (bug)[3382424] Suppress noisy messages on macOS (culler) 2017-12-08 (new)[TIP 477] nmake build system reform (nadkarni) 2017-12-18 (bug)[b77626] Make [tk busy -cursor] silent no-op on macOS (vogel) --- Released 8.6.8, December 22, 2017 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tk/ for details Changes to 8.7a1 include all changes to the 8.6 line through 8.6.7, plus the following, which focuses on the high-level feature changes in this changeset (new minor version) rather than bug fixes: 2016-03-07 (feature)[841280] spinbox autoswap -to/-from to get ordering (vogel) 2016-03-27 (feature)[38dc27] Support <Button-6> & <Button-7> (nijtmans) 2016-08-29 (TIP 449) [text] undo/redo return character range (vogel) 2016-11-02 (feature) Removed undocumented command [tk_getFileType] (vogel) *** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY *** 2017-02-05 (bug)[c0dbdd] Compatibility fonts shadowed system fonts (vogel) 2017-03-21 (TIP 442) display text in a progressbar (zaumseil) 2017-04-13 \u escaped content in msg files converted to true utf-8 (nijtmans) 2017-08-24 (bug)[f1a3ca] Memleak in text operations (hume) 2017-08-24 (bug)[ee40fd] Error reporting from failed console init (the) 2017-08-24 (bug)[3295446] Keep console cursor visible when using history (goth) 2017-08-28 (TIP 166) Extended color notation for alpha channel (bachmann) --- Released 8.7a1, September 8, 2017 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tk/ for details |
Changes to doc/3DBorder.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/BindTable.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CanvPsY.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CanvTkwin.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CanvTxtInfo.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Clipboard.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ClrSelect.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ConfigWind.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CoordToWin.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtCmHdlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtConsoleChan.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2007 ActiveState Software Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtErrHdlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtGenHdlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/DeleteImg.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/DrawFocHlt.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/FindPhoto.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | - - + + | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_FindPhoto\fR returns an opaque handle that is used to identify a particular photo image to the other procedures. The parameter is the name of the image, that is, the name specified to the \fBimage create photo\fR command, or assigned by that command if no name was specified. |
︙ | |||
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | - - + + + + + + + - - - + + + + + + + | int \fIoffset\fR[4]; } \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR; .CE The \fIpixelPtr\fR field points to the first pixel, that is, the top-left pixel in the block. The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR fields specify the dimensions of the block of pixels. The \fIpixelSize\fR field specifies the address |
︙ | |||
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 | - + - - - + + + - - - + + + | \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR can be used to retrieve image data from a photo image. \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR fills in the structure pointed to by the \fIblockPtr\fR parameter with values that describe the address and layout of the image data that the photo image has stored internally. The values are valid until the image is destroyed or its size is changed. .PP |
︙ | |||
244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | In Tk 8.4, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR did not take an \fIinterp\fR argument or return any result code. If insufficient memory was available for an image, Tk would panic. This behaviour is still supported if you compile your extension with the additional flag -DUSE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE. Code linked using Stubs against older versions of Tk will continue to work. .SH BUGS The \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure used to provide image data to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR promises great flexibility in the layout of the data (e.g. separate planes for the red, green, blue and alpha channels). Unfortunately, the implementation fails to hold this promise. The problem is that the \fIpixelSize\fR field is (incorrectly) used to determine whether the image has an alpha channel. Currently, if the offset for the alpha channel is greater or equal than \fIpixelSize\fR, \fBtk_PhotoPutblock\fR assumes no alpha data is present and makes the image fully opaque. This means that for layouts where the channels are separate (or any other exotic layout where \fIpixelSize\fR has to be smaller than the alpha offset), the alpha channel will not be read correctly. In order to be on the safe side if this issue will be corrected in a future release, it is strongly recommended you always provide alpha data - even if the image has no transparency - and only use the "standard" layout with a \fIpixelSize\fR of 2 for grayscale and 4 for RGB data with \fIoffset\fRs of 0, 0, 0, 1 or 0, 1, 2, 3 respectively. .SH CREDITS .PP The code for the photo image type was developed by Paul Mackerras, based on his earlier photo widget code. .SH KEYWORDS photo, image |
Changes to doc/FreeXId.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - + - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
Changes to doc/GeomReq.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetAnchor.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetBitmap.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetCapStyl.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetClrmap.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetDash.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1989-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetGC.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetHINSTANCE.3.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetHWND.3.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetImage.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetJoinStl.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetJustify.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetOption.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixmap.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetRelief.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetRootCrd.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetSelect.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetUid.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetVRoot.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/GetVisual.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Grab.3.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/HWNDToWindow.3.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/HandleEvent.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/IdToWindow.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Inactive.3.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | - + - + - - + + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
Changes to doc/InternAtom.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/MainLoop.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/MainWin.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/MaintGeom.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/MoveToplev.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Name.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/OwnSelect.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/QWinEvent.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Restack.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/RestrictEv.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetAppName.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetCaret.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClass.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetGrid.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 | - + | .AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable. .AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/SetVisual.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/StrictMotif.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/TkInitStubs.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/Tk_Init.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/bell.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/bind.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | - + - - - + + + + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 | - + | there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the |
︙ | |||
383 384 385 386 387 388 389 | 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 | - + + | to print out the keysym name for a particular key. If a keysym \fIdetail\fR is given, then the \fItype\fR field may be omitted; it will default to \fBKeyPress\fR. For example, \fB<Control\-comma>\fR is equivalent to \fB<Control\-KeyPress\-comma>\fR. .SH "BINDING SCRIPTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS" .PP |
︙ | |||
602 603 604 605 606 607 608 | 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 | - - - + + + + + + + + + + + | an \fBall\fR binding. The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to change this order for a particular window or to associate additional binding tags with the window. .PP The \fBcontinue\fR and \fBbreak\fR commands may be used inside a binding script to control the processing of matching scripts. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/bindtags.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/bitmap.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/busy.n.
︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | - + + + - - - + + + + | '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME |
︙ | |||
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | - - + + | The \fBtk busy\fR command lets you make Tk widgets busy. This means that user interactions such as button clicks, moving the mouse, typing at the keyboard, etc.\0are ignored by the widget. You can set a special cursor (like a watch) that overrides the widget's normal cursor, providing feedback that the application (widget) is temporarily busy. .PP When a widget is made busy, the widget and all of its descendants will ignore |
︙ | |||
123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 | - + - - - + - - + - - - - - - + - - - - - | .PP The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command: .TP \fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command. .TP |
︙ | |||
175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 | + + + + + + - + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + - - - + + + + + + + - - + + + + - + + | specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command: .PP .CS option add *frame.busyCursor gumby option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby .CE .RE .TP \fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR? . Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a \fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching \fIpattern\fR are returned. .TP \fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?... . Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR, including the transparent window. User events will again be received by \fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed. \fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR operation, otherwise an error is reported. .TP |
Changes to doc/canvas.n.
︙ | |||
543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 | 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 | + + + + + + + + + | If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by \fItagOrId\fR. If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current coordinates for the named item. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the first one in the display list is used. .RS .PP Note that for rectangles, ovals and arcs the returned list of coordinates has a fixed order, namely the left, top, right and bottom coordinates, which may not be the order originally given. Also the coordinates are always returned in screen units with no units (that is, in pixels). So if the original coordinates were specified for instance in centimeters or inches, the returned values will nevertheless be in pixels. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? . Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR. The exact format of the arguments after \fItype\fR depends |
︙ | |||
644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 | 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage \fIimagename\fR ?\fIsubsample\fR? ?\fIzoom\fR? . Draw the canvas into the Tk photo image named \fIimagename\fR. If a \fB-scrollregion\fR has been defined then this will be the boundaries of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Otherwise the widget width and height with an origin of 0,0 will be the size of the canvas region drawn and the final size of the photo image. Optionally an integer \fIsubsample\fR factor may be given and the photo image will be reduced in size. In addition to the \fIsubsample\fR an integer \fIzoom\fR factor can also be given and the photo image will be enlarged. The image background will be filled with the canvas background colour. The canvas widget does not need to be mapped for this widget command to work, but at least one of it's ancestors must be mapped. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR .VS 8.6 This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR). Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line |
︙ |
Changes to doc/chooseColor.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/chooseDirectory.n.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | + + + + + + + + + + + | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This is only available on Mac OS X. .TP \fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirname\fR Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified, the initial directory defaults to the current working directory on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista. On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last user-selected directory for the application. If the parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the relative path to an absolute path. .TP \fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog. This is only available on Mac OS X. .TP \fB\-mustexist\fR \fIboolean\fR Specifies whether the user may specify non-existent directories. If this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that already exist. The default value is \fIfalse\fR. .TP \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog |
︙ |
Changes to doc/console.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/cursors.n.
1 2 3 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/destroy.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/dialog.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/entry.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | - + + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/event.n.
︙ | |||
334 335 336 337 338 339 340 | 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | - + + + | changed. .TP \fB<<Selection>>\fR This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR |
︙ |
Changes to doc/focus.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/focusNext.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/fontchooser.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]> '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/frame.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/getOpenFile.n.
︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 | 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | + + + + + + + | as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation whether the existing file should be overwritten or not. .PP The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments to these two commands: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog after having selected an item. This callback is not called if the user cancelled the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the value selected by the user in the dialog. This is only available on Mac OS X. .TP \fB\-confirmoverwrite\fR \fIboolean\fR Configures how the Save dialog reacts when the selected file already exists, and saving would overwrite it. A true value requests a confirmation dialog be presented to the user. A false value requests that the overwrite take place without confirmation. Default value is true. .TP \fB\-defaultextension\fR \fIextension\fR |
︙ |
Changes to doc/grab.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/grid.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | + - + | This space is added outside the slave(s) border. .TP \fB\-row \fIn\fR . Insert the slave so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid. Row numbers start with 0. If this option is not supplied, then the slave is arranged on the same row as the previous slave specified on this call to \fBgrid\fR, or the next row after the highest occupied row |
︙ | |||
197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 | + + + + + + + + | . Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its master and unmaps their windows. The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. .RS .PP .VS TIP518 If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE TIP518 .RE .TP \fBgrid info \fIslave\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are |
︙ | |||
273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 | 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 | + + + + + + + + | Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its master and unmaps their windows. The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. .RS .PP .VS TIP518 If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE TIP518 .RE .TP \fBgrid size \fImaster\fR . Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fImaster\fR. The size is determined either by the \fIslave\fR occupying the largest row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/image.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/keysyms.n.
︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | + + - + | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Tk recognizes many keysyms when specifying key bindings (e.g., .QW "\fBbind\fR \fB. <Key-\fR\fIkeysym\fR\fB>\fR" ). The following list enumerates the keysyms that will be recognized by Tk. Note that not all keysyms will be valid on all platforms, and some keysyms are also available on platforms that have a different native name for that key. |
︙ | |||
914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 | 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 | + + + + + + + | Alt_L 65513 0xffe9 Alt_R 65514 0xffea Super_L 65515 0xffeb Super_R 65516 0xffec Hyper_L 65517 0xffed Hyper_R 65518 0xffee Delete 65535 0xffff XF86AudioLowerVolume 269025041 0x1008FF11 XF86AudioMute 269025042 0x1008FF12 XF86AudioRaiseVolume 269025043 0x1008FF13 XF86AudioPlay 269025044 0x1008FF14 XF86AudioStop 269025045 0x1008FF15 XF86AudioPrev 269025046 0x1008FF16 XF86AudioNext 269025047 0x1008FF17 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), event(n) .SH KEYWORDS bind, binding, event, keysym '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/label.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/lower.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/menu.n.
︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 | - + - - - - - - + + + + + + | .nf \fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR .SO \-activebackground \-borderwidth \-foreground \-activeborderwidth \-cursor \-relief \-activeforeground \-disabledforeground \-takefocus |
︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | - + | a bitmap, or an image, controlled by the \fB\-label\fR, \fB\-bitmap\fR, and \fB\-image\fR options for the entry. If the \fB\-accelerator\fR option is specified for an entry then a second textual field is displayed to the right of the label. The accelerator typically describes a keystroke sequence that may be used in the application to cause the same result as invoking the menu entry. This is a display option, it does not actually set the corresponding |
︙ |
Changes to doc/menubar.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/menubutton.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/message.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/messageBox.n.
︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | + + + + + + | the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic name (see the \fB\-type\fR options). After the message window is popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button. .PP The following option-value pairs are supported: .TP \fB\-command\fR \fIstring\fR Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke when the user closes the dialog. The actual command consists of \fIstring\fR followed by a space and the name of the button clicked by the user to close the dialog. This is only available on Mac OS X. .TP \fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR . \fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for this message window ( .QW ok , .QW cancel , and so on). See \fB\-type\fR |
︙ |
Changes to doc/option.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/optionMenu.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/options.n.
︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 | + + + | definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-activerelief activeRelief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the active item of the widget. See the \fB-relief\fR option for details. .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap) is to be displayed in the widget. Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget. |
︙ | |||
217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | + + + + + + + + | this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. .OP \-placeholder placeHolder PlaceHolder Specifies a help text string to display if no text is otherwise displayed, that is when the widget is empty. The placeholder text is displayed using the values of the \fB\-font\fR and \fB\-justify\fR options. .OP \-placeholderforeground placeholderForeground PlaceholderForeground Specifies the foreground color to use when the placeholder text is displayed. If this option is the empty string, the default color gray70 is used. .OP \-relief relief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR. The value indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative to its exterior; for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of |
︙ |
Changes to doc/pack-old.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/pack.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 | + + + + + + + + | than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from the packing order for its master and unmaps their windows. The slaves will no longer be managed by the packer. .RS .PP .VS TIP518 If the last slave of the master becomes unmanaged, this will also send the virtual event \fB<<NoManagedChild>>\fR to the master; the master may choose to resize itself (or otherwise respond) to such a change. .VE TIP518 .RE .TP \fBpack info \fIslave\fR Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fImaster\fR" |
︙ |
Changes to doc/palette.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.
︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | + + + + + + + + + + + - - - | .OP \-handlesize handleSize HandleSize Specifies the side length of a sash handle. Handles are always drawn as squares. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the overall panedwindow widget. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If an empty string, the widget will be made high enough to allow all contained widgets to have their natural height. .OP \-opaqueresize opaqueResize OpaqueResize Specifies whether panes should be resized as a sash is moved (true), or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false). In the latter case, a .QW ghost version of the sash is displayed during the resizing to show where the panes will be resized to when releasing the mouse button. This .QW ghost version of the sash is the proxy. It's rendering can be configured using the \fB-proxybackground\fR, \fB-proxyborderwidth\fR and \fB-proxyrelief\fR options. .OP \-proxybackground proxyBackground ProxyBackground Background color to use when drawing the proxy. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-background\fR option will be used. .OP \-proxyborderwidth proxyBorderWidth ProxyBorderWidth Specifies the borderwidth of the proxy. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-proxyrelief proxyRelief ProxyRelief Relief to use when drawing the proxy. May be any of the standard Tk relief values. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-sashrelief\fR option will be used. |
︙ | |||
128 129 130 131 132 133 134 | 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | . Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates. If the point is over a sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}. If the point is over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list. |
︙ | |||
306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 | 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the panedwindow. \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpanes\fR . Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the position of the sash proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy coord\fR . Return a list containing the x and y coordinates of the most recent proxy location. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy forget\fR . Remove the proxy from the display. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR . Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsash \fR?\fIargs\fR? This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the panedwindow. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR . Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR must be an integer between 0 and 1 less than the number of panes in the panedwindow. The coordinates given are those of the top left corner of the region containing the sash. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash dragto \fIindex x y\fR . This command computes the difference between the given coordinates and the coordinates given to the last \fBsash mark\fR command for the given sash. It then moves that sash the computed difference. The return value is the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash mark \fIindex x y\fR . Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR for the sash given by \fIindex\fR; used in conjunction with later \fBsash dragto\fR commands to move the sash. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash place \fIindex x y\fR . Place the sash given by \fIindex\fR at the given coordinates. .RE .SH "RESIZING PANES" .PP A pane is resized by grabbing the sash (or sash handle if present) and dragging with the mouse. This is accomplished via mouse motion bindings on the widget. When a sash is moved, the sizes of the panes on each side of the sash, and thus the widgets in those panes, are adjusted. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/photo.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | - + - + - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + + + + - - + + + + + + - - - - - + + + + - + - + + + + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
229 230 231 232 233 234 235 | 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | - - + + + + + + + + - + - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + + + - + - + + + + + + - + - + - - + - - - - + - + - + + + + + + + - + - + - + + + + + | is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . |
︙ | |||
367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 | 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 | + - + - - + + + + + + - + - - + + + + + + + - + + - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + | displayed. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in the photo image. Several subcommands are available: .RS .VS 8.7 .TP |
︙ | |||
422 423 424 425 426 427 428 | 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 | + + + + + - + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF formats, .VS 8.7 as well as the \fBdefault\fR handler to encode/decode image data in a human readable form. .VE 8.7 |
︙ | |||
530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 | 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .CS \fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png" \fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e \-format "png \-alpha 0.5" button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled .CE .VE 8.6 .PP .VS 8.7 Create a green box with a simple shadow effect .PP .CS \fBimage create photo\fR foo # Make a simple graduated fill varying in alpha for the shadow for {set i 14} {$i > 0} {incr i -1} { set i2 [expr {$i + 30}] foo \fBput\fR [format black#%x [expr {15-$i}]] -to $i $i $i2 $i2 } # Put a solid green rectangle on top foo \fBput\fR #F080 -to 0 0 30 30 .VE 8.7 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" image(n) .SH KEYWORDS photo, image, color '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/place.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/popup.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/radiobutton.n.
︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + | If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn. Must be a proper boolean value. If false, the \fB\-relief\fR option is ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is selected and raised otherwise. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/raise.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | + + + | \fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just above \fIaboveThis\fR (or the ancestor of \fIaboveThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR); this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR. .PP All \fBtoplevel\fR windows may be restacked with respect to each other, whatever their relative path names, but the window manager is not obligated to strictly honor requests to restack. .PP On macOS raising an iconified \fBtoplevel\fR window causes it to be deiconified. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the display: .CS |
︙ |
Changes to doc/scale.n.
︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 | - + - - + + | .OP \-variable variable Variable Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale. Whenever the value of the variable changes, the scale will update to reflect this value. Whenever the scale is manipulated interactively, the variable will be modified to reflect the scale's new value. .OP \-width width Width |
︙ |
Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/selection.n.
︙ | |||
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 | 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified that it has lost the selection. If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when some other window claims ownership of the selection away from \fIwindow\fR. \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY. .RE .SH WIDGET FACILITIES .PP The \fBtext\fR, \fBentry\fR, \fBttk::entry\fR, \fBlistbox\fR, \fBspinbox\fR and \fBttk::spinbox\fR widgets have the option \fB\-exportselection\fR. If a widget has this option set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, then (in an unsafe interpreter) a selection made in the widget is automatically written to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection. .PP A GUI event, for example \fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR, can copy the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection to certain widgets. This copy is implemented by a widget binding to the event. The binding script makes appropriate calls to the \fBselection\fR command. .PP .SH PORTABILITY ISSUES .PP On X11, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is a system-wide feature of the X server, allowing communication between different processes that are X11 clients. .PP On Windows, the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is not provided by the system, but only by Tk, and so it is shared only between windows of a master interpreter and its unsafe slave interpreters. It is not shared between interpreters in different processes or different threads. Each master interpreter has a separate \fBPRIMARY\fR selection that is shared only with its unsafe slaves. .PP .SH SECURITY .PP A safe interpreter cannot read from the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection because its \fBselection\fR command is hidden. For this reason the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection cannot be written to the Tk widgets of a safe interpreter. .PP A Tk widget can have its option \fB\-exportselection\fR set to boolean \fBtrue\fR, but in a safe interpreter this option has no effect: writing from the widget to the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection is disabled. .PP These are security features. A safe interpreter may run untrusted code, and it is a security risk if this untrusted code can read or write the \fBPRIMARY\fR selection used by other interpreters. .PP .SH EXAMPLES .PP On X11 platforms, one of the standard selections available is the \fBSECONDARY\fR selection. Hardly anything uses it, but here is how to read it using Tk: .PP .CS |
︙ |
Changes to doc/send.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/spinbox.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | - + + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Jeffrey Hobbs. '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 | - + + | when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range. This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR, as it will format a floating-point number. .OP \-from from From A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its |
︙ | |||
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 | - + + | displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-to to To A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control |
︙ | |||
213 214 215 216 217 218 219 | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 | - - - + + + - - + + + + + + | \fI%W config \-validate %v\fR .CE in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you were editing the spinbox widget from). It is also recommended to not set an associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the spinbox widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .PP |
︙ |
Changes to doc/text.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
533 534 535 536 537 538 539 | 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 | - + | option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided character of that display line. .TP \fB\-rmargincolor \fIcolor\fR . \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not |
︙ | |||
605 606 607 608 609 610 611 | 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 | + + - - - + + + | have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used. .TP \fB\-wrap \fImode\fR . \fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's window. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. It has the same legal |
︙ | |||
1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 | 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 | - - + + + - - - + + + + | The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag of the widget to \fIboolean\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR . When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided |
︙ | |||
2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 | 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 | - - - + + + | .IP [28] Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor. .IP [29] Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [30] |
︙ |
Changes to doc/tk.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/tk4.0.ps.
︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | - + | % FrameMaker. % NOTE % This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output. % Any questions should be sent to [email protected] % % Known Problems: % Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1 |
︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | - + - - - - + + + + - - - + + + - - - - - + + + + + - - + + - + - - - + + + - - + + - - - + + + - - + + - - + + - - + + - - + + - + - + - - + + - - - - - + + + + + - - + + - - + + - - - + + + - + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - + + - + - + - - + + - - + + - + | % } if systemdict /colorimage known systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and exit } loop def % Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer % /FMPrintInColor false def |
︙ | |||
233 234 235 236 237 238 239 | 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 | - - - + + + - + - + - + | /A4 {a4tray a4} def /A4Small {a4tray a4small} def /B4 {b4tray b4} def /B5 {b5tray b5} def /unknown {unknown} def papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get end |
︙ | |||
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 | - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - + | /fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl /periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand /Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute /Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron ] def |
︙ | |||
366 367 368 369 370 371 372 | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 | - - + + - + - - + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - - + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - - + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - - - + + + - + - - - - - + + + + + - - - + + + - - - + + + - - - + + + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - + - - - - + + + + - + | orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen } if } bind def /HUE FMLOCAL /SAT FMLOCAL /BRIGHT FMLOCAL /Colors FMLOCAL |
︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 | 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 | - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - - + + + - + - - - + + + - + - - - + + + - + - - - + + + - - + + - + - + - + - + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + - + - - + + - - + + - + | /val FMLOCAL /ws FMLOCAL /im FMLOCAL /bs FMLOCAL /cs FMLOCAL /len FMLOCAL /pos FMLOCAL |
︙ | |||
809 810 811 812 813 814 815 | 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 | - + - + - + - - - - + + + + - + - - - + + + - - - - + + + + - + - + - - + + - - - - + + + + - + - + - + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - + - - + + - - - - + + + + - + - + - + - + - - - - + + + + - + - + - + - + | setcolortransfer {pop 0} setundercolorremoval {} setblackgeneration } bind def /tran FMLOCAL /fakecolorsetup { /tran 256 string def |
︙ |
Changes to doc/tk_mac.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Kevin Walzer. '\" Copyright (c) 2011 Donal K. Fellows. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/tkvars.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/tkwait.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/toplevel.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_Theme.3.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_button.n.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | - + | \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor |
︙ | |||
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | \fBdisabled\fR means that it is not defaultable. The default is \fBnormal\fR. .RS .PP Depending on the theme, the default button may be displayed with an extra highlight ring, or with a different border color. .RE |
Changes to doc/ttk_checkbutton.n.
︙ | |||
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | or .QW indeterminate selection.) .SH "STANDARD STYLES" .PP \fBTtk::checkbutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::checkbutton\fP is \fBTCheckbutton\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBalternate\fP, \fBdisabled\fP, \fBpressed\fP, \fBselected\fP, \fBreadonly\fP. .PP \fBTCheckbutton\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatorbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatorcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatormargin\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-indicatorrelief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::radiobutton(n), checkbutton(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, button, toggle, check, option '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_combobox.n.
︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | - + | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values; the user may select the value of the text field from among the values in the list. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus |
︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .DE .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The combobox widget generates a \fB<<ComboboxSelected>>\fR virtual event when the user selects an element from the list of values. If the selection action unposts the listbox, this event is delivered after the listbox is unposted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::combobox\fP is \fBTCombobox\fP. The \fBttk::combobox\fP uses the \fBentry\fP and \fBlistbox\fP widgets internally. The listbox frame has a class name of \fBComboboxPopdownFrame\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBdisabled\fP, \fBfocus\fP, \fBpressed\fP, \fBreadonly\fP. .PP \fBTCombobox\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-arrowcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-focusfill\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Can only be changed when using non-native and non-graphical themes. .RE \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-postoffset\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Text entry select background. .RE \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Text entry select foreground. .RE .PP The \fBttk::combobox\fP popdown listbox cannot be configured using \fBttk::style\fP nor via the widget \fBconfigure\fP command. The listbox can be configured using the option database. .PP option add *TCombobox*Listbox.background \fIcolor\fP .br option add *TCombobox*Listbox.font \fIfont\fP .br option add *TCombobox*Listbox.foreground \fIcolor\fP .br option add *TCombobox*Listbox.selectBackground \fIcolor\fP .br option add *TCombobox*Listbox.selectForeground \fIcolor\fP .PP To configure a specific listbox (subject to future change): .CS set popdown [ttk::combobox::PopdownWindow .mycombobox] $popdown.f.l configure \-font \fIfont\fP .CE .PP \fBComboboxPopdownFrame\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-borderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::entry(n) .SH KEYWORDS choice, entry, list box, text box, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_entry.n.
︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 | - - + + + + - - | An \fBttk::entry\fR widget displays a one-line text string and allows that string to be edited by the user. The value of the string may be linked to a Tcl variable with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget |
︙ | |||
457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 | 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | Typically, the text is .QW grayed-out in the \fBdisabled\fR state, and a different background is used in the \fBreadonly\fR state. .PP The entry widget sets the \fBinvalid\fR state if revalidation fails, and clears it whenever validation succeeds. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::entry\fP is \fBTEntry\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBdisabled\fP, \fBfocus\fP, \fBreadonly\fP. .PP \fBTEntry\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS When using the aqua theme (Mac OS X), changes the \fB\-fieldbackground\fP. .RE \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Does not work with the aqua theme (Mac OS X). .br Some themes use a graphical background and their field background colors cannot be changed. .RE \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-selectborderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), entry(n) .SH KEYWORDS entry, widget, text field '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_frame.n.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | - - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + | \fBttk::frame\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::frame\fR widget is a container, used to group other widgets together. .SO ttk_widget |
Changes to doc/ttk_image.n.
︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + | .SH OPTIONS .PP Valid \fIoptions\fR are: .TP \fB\-border\fR \fIpadding\fR \fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers, specifying the left, top, right, and bottom borders, respectively. If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right border; a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical border; a single number specifies the same border all the way around the element. See \fBIMAGE STRETCHING\fR, below. .TP \fB\-height \fIheight\fR Specifies a minimum height for the element. If less than zero, the base image's height is used as a default. .TP \fB\-padding\fR \fIpadding\fR |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_label.n.
︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | - - + + + - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image. The label may be linked to a Tcl variable to automatically change the displayed text. .SO ttk_widget |
Changes to doc/ttk_labelframe.n.
︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | - - + + | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget is a container used to group other widgets together. It has an optional label, which may be a plain text string or another widget. .SO ttk_widget |
︙ | |||
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | Specifies the text of the label. .OP \-underline underline Underline If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline in the text string. The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation. Mnemonic activation for a \fBttk::labelframe\fR sets the keyboard focus to the first child of the \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget. |
Changes to doc/ttk_menubutton.n.
︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | Menubutton widgets support the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR methods. No other widget methods are used. .SH "STANDARD STYLES" .PP \fBTtk::menubutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::menubutton\fP is \fBTMenubutton\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBdisabled\fP, \fBreadonly\fP. .PP \fBTMenubutton\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-arrowsize\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-width\fP \fIamount\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), menu(n), menubutton(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, button, menu '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_notebook.n.
︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | + + + | of the notebook. The padding is a list of up to four length specifications \fIleft top right bottom\fR. If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding; a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding; a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget. .OP \-width width Width If present and greater than zero, specifies the desired width of the pane area (not including internal padding). Otherwise, the maximum width of all panes is used. .SH "TAB OPTIONS" The following options may be specified for individual notebook panes: |
︙ | |||
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 | - + + | returns a dictionary of the tab option values. If one \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that \fIoption\fR. Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs. See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBtabs\fR |
︙ | |||
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 | 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .CS pack [\fBttk::notebook\fR .nb] \&.nb add [frame .nb.f1] \-text "First tab" \&.nb add [frame .nb.f2] \-text "Second tab" \&.nb select .nb.f2 ttk::notebook::enableTraversal .nb .CE .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::notebook\fP is \fBTNotebook\fP. The tab has a class name of \fBTNotebook.Tab\fP .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBdisabled\fP, \fBselected\fP. .PP \fBTNotebook\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-tabmargins\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-tabposition\fP \fIside\fP .br .PP \fBTNotebook.Tab\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-expand\fP \fIpadding\fP .RS Defines how much the tab grows in size. Usually used with the \fBselected\fP dynamic state. \fB\-tabmargins\fP should be set appropriately so that there is room for the tab growth. .RE \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), grid(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" pane, tab '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_panedwindow.n.
︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | where \fIpane\fR is either an integer index or the name of a managed subwindow. If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of the pane option values. If one \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that \fIoption\fR. Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs. .TP \fIpathname \fBpanes\fR |
Changes to doc/ttk_progressbar.n.
︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | + + + + + + - - + + + - - - - + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and \fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know that something is happening. .PP If the value of \fB-orient\fR is \fBhorizontal\fR a text string can be displayed inside the progressbar. This string can be configured using the \fB-anchor\fR, \fB-font\fR, \fB-foreground\fR, \fB-justify\fR, \fB-text\fR and \fB-wraplength\fR options. If the value of \fB-orient\fR is \fBvertical\fR then these options are ignored. .SO ttk_widget |
︙ | |||
82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | \fIpathName \fBstep\fR ?\fIamount\fR? Increments the \fB\-value\fR by \fIamount\fR. \fIamount\fR defaults to 1.0 if omitted. .TP \fIpathName \fBstop\fR Stop autoincrement mode: cancels any recurring timer event initiated by \fIpathName \fBstart\fR. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::progressbar\fP is \fBTProgressbar\fP. .PP \fBTProgressbar\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-maxphase\fP .RS For the aqua theme. .RE \fB\-period\fP .RS For the aqua theme. .RE \fB\-troughcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n) '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_radiobutton.n.
︙ | |||
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | or .QW indeterminate selection.) .SH "STANDARD STYLES" .PP \fBTtk::radiobutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::radiobutton\fP is \fBTRadiobutton\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBalternate\fP, \fBdisabled\fP, \fBpressed\fP, \fBreadonly\fP, \fBselected\fP. .PP \fBTRadiobutton\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatorbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatorcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatormargin\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-indicatorrelief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::checkbutton(n), radiobutton(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, button, option '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_scale.n.
︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .PP .TP \fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR? . Get the coordinates corresponding to \fIvalue\fR, or the coordinates corresponding to the current value of the \fB\-value\fR option if \fIvalue\fR is omitted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTProgressbar\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP. .PP \fBTProgressbar\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-borderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-groovewidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-sliderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-troughcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-troughrelief\fP \fIrelief\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), scale(n) .SH KEYWORDS scale, slider, trough, widget .\" Local Variables: .\" mode: nroff .\" fill-column: 78 |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scrollbar.n.
︙ | |||
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | text $f.t \-xscrollcommand [list $f.hsb set] \-yscrollcommand [list $f.vsb set] grid $f.t \-row 0 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew grid $f.vsb \-row 0 \-column 1 \-sticky nsew grid $f.hsb \-row 1 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew grid columnconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1 grid rowconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1 .CE .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scrollbar\fP is \fBTScrollbar\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP, \fBdisabled\fP. .PP \fBTScrollbar\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-arrowcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-troughcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), scrollbar(n) .SH KEYWORDS scrollbar, widget '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_separator.n.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | \fBttk::separator\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::separator\fR widget displays a horizontal or vertical separator bar. .SO ttk_widget |
Changes to doc/ttk_sizegrip.n.
1 2 3 4 5 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | - + - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2006 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + | instead of .QW "\fBwm geometry ... \fIw\fBx\fIh\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR" ), the sizegrip widget will not resize the window. .PP \fBttk::sizegrip\fR widgets only support .QW southeast resizing. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::sizegrip\fP is \fBTSizegrip\fP. .PP \fBTSizegrip\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, sizegrip, grow box '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_spinbox.n.
︙ | |||
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 | - - + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | A \fBttk::spinbox\fR widget is a \fBttk::entry\fR widget with built-in up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the \fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget to a Tcl variable. .SO ttk_widget |
Changes to doc/ttk_treeview.n.
︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | + - - - - | .PP Treeview widgets support horizontal and vertical scrolling with the standard \fB\-\fR[\fBxy\fR]\fBscrollcommand\fR options and [\fBxy\fR]\fBview\fR widget commands. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style \-xscrollcommand \-yscrollcommand \-padding .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-columns columns Columns A list of column identifiers, specifying the number of columns and their names. .\"X: This is a read-only option; it may only be set when the widget is created. .OP \-displaycolumns displayColumns DisplayColumns A list of column identifiers (either symbolic names or integer indices) specifying which data columns are displayed and the order in which they appear, or the string \fB#all\fP. If set to \fB#all\fP (the default), all columns are shown in the order given. .OP \-height height Height Specifies the number of rows which should be visible. Note: the requested width is determined from the sum of the column widths. |
︙ | |||
473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 | 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. '\" Not yet: '\" In Tk 8.5, the affected item is also passed as the \fB\-detail\fR field '\" of the virtual event. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::treeview\fP is \fBTreeview\fP. The treeview header class name is \fBHeading\fP. The treeview item class name is \fBItem\fP. The treeview cell class name is \fBCell\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBdisabled\fP, \fBselected\fP. .PP \fBTreeview\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIamount\fP .RS The \fB\-rowheight\fP value is not corrected by the \fBtk scaling\fP value or by the configured font size and must always be set. Also make sure that the \fB\-rowheight\fP is large enough to contain any images. .PP To adjust the \fB\-rowheight\fP for the Treeview style, use the following code after \fBtk scaling\fP has been applied. Note that even if you do not support or change \fBtk scaling\fP in your program, your users may have it set in their .wishrc. .RE .PP .CS ttk::style configure Treeview \\ \-rowheight [expr {[font metrics \fIfont\fP \-linespace] + 2}] .CE .PP \fBHeading\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .PP \fBItem\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indicatormargins\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-indicatorsize\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .PP \fBCell\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure ttk styles. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), listbox(n), image(n), bind(n) '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/ttk_vsapi.n.
︙ | |||
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | + + + + + + + | Valid \fIoptions\fR are: .TP \fB\-padding \fIpadding\fR . Specify the element's interior padding. \fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively. If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding; a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding; a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget. This option may not be mixed with any other options. .TP \fB\-margins \fIpadding\fR . Specifies the elements exterior padding. \fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively. |
︙ | |||
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 | - + | .SH "STATE MAP" .PP The \fIstateMap\fR parameter is a list of ttk states and the corresponding Visual Styles API state value. This permits the element appearance to respond to changes in the widget state such as becoming active or being pressed. The list should be as described for the \fBttk::style map\fR command but note that the |
︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_widget.n.
︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 | - - + + - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | .RE .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details. .SH "LABEL OPTIONS" The following options are supported by labels, buttons, and other button-like widgets: |
︙ |
Changes to doc/winfo.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ |
Changes to doc/wish.1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | - + | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
︙ | |||
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | - + | It will continue processing commands until all windows have been deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input. If there exists a file .QW \fB.wishrc\fR in the home directory of the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script just before reading the first command from standard input. .PP |
︙ |
Changes to doc/wm.n.
︙ | |||
484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 | - + + + + + + + | vice versa. .PP On X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property, which most modern window managers support. A \fBwm iconbitmap\fR may exist simultaneously. It is recommended to use not more than 2 icons, placing the larger icon first. .PP |
︙ |
Changes to generic/ks_names.h.
1 | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | - + + + + + + + + + + + | /* |
︙ | |||
916 917 918 919 920 921 922 | 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 | + + + + + + + | { "hebrew_finalzadi", 0xcf5 }, { "hebrew_zadi", 0xcf6 }, { "hebrew_kuf", 0xcf7 }, { "hebrew_resh", 0xcf8 }, { "hebrew_shin", 0xcf9 }, { "hebrew_taf", 0xcfa }, { "Hebrew_switch", 0xFF7E }, { "XF86AudioLowerVolume", 0x1008FF11 }, { "XF86AudioMute", 0x1008FF12 }, { "XF86AudioRaiseVolume", 0x1008FF13 }, { "XF86AudioPlay", 0x1008FF14 }, { "XF86AudioStop", 0x1008FF15 }, { "XF86AudioPrev", 0x1008FF16 }, { "XF86AudioNext", 0x1008FF17 }, |
Changes to generic/tk.decls.
︙ | |||
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | - + | void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc) } declare 18 { int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset) } declare 19 { |
︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | - + | int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags) } declare 29 { int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, |
︙ | |||
241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 | - + | declare 53 { void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target) } declare 54 { void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin) } declare 55 { |
︙ | |||
322 323 324 325 326 327 328 | 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 | - + | } declare 75 { void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap) } declare 76 { void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout) } |
︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 | - + - + | Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object) } declare 82 { int Tk_GetAnchor(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *str, Tk_Anchor *anchorPtr) } declare 83 { |
︙ | |||
400 401 402 403 404 405 406 | 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 | - + | } declare 97 { Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData) } declare 98 { ClientData Tk_GetImageMasterData(Tcl_Interp *interp, |
︙ | |||
435 436 437 438 439 440 441 | 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 | - + | int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr) } declare 107 { void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr) } declare 108 { int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, |
︙ | |||
514 515 516 517 518 519 520 | 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 | - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + | declare 128 { void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y) } declare 129 { void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y) } declare 130 { |
︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 | - + | declare 193 { void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 194 { void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 195 { |
︙ | |||
770 771 772 773 774 775 776 | 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 | - + - + | XColor *Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 203 { Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr) } declare 204 { Tcl_Obj *Tk_GetOptionInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, |
︙ | |||
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 | - + - + | Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int *resultPtr) } declare 210 { int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], double *dblPtr, int *intPtr) } declare 211 { |
︙ | |||
939 940 941 942 943 944 945 | 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 | - + - + | } # New in 8.4a5 # declare 245 { void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height) } |
︙ | |||
997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 | 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 | - + - + - + - + | } declare 260 { Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable) } declare 261 { void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, |
︙ | |||
1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 | 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 | + + + + + + + + | # Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table. export { const char *Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version, int exact) } export { void Tk_MainEx(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp) } export { void Tk_MainExW(int argc, wchar_t **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); } # Local Variables: # mode: tcl # End: |
Changes to generic/tk.h.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | - - + + - - - - - - - | * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include <tcl.h> |
︙ | |||
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 | 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 | - - + + - - - + + + - - + + | #endif /* * When version numbers change here, you must also go into the following files * and update the version numbers: * * library/tk.tcl (1 LOC patch) |
︙ | |||
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | + + + + | #ifdef __STDC__ # include <stddef.h> #endif #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #else # ifndef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT # endif #endif /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Decide whether or not to use input methods. */ |
︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | + - + - + + + + + | const char *optionName; /* Name used to specify option in Tcl * commands. */ const char *dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */ const char *dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */ const char *defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified * in command line, the option database, or * the system. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 |
︙ | |||
286 287 288 289 290 291 292 | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | - + - + + - + + + + | * option. */ Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of * a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was * not saved as an object. */ double internalForm; /* The old value of the option, in some * internal representation such as an int or * (XColor *). Valid only if the field |
︙ | |||
331 332 333 334 335 336 337 | 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 | - - + + | * This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets are in * development. */ #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG typedef int (Tk_OptionParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, |
︙ | |||
358 359 360 361 362 363 364 | 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | - + + - + + + + - + | * database, etc. */ typedef struct Tk_ConfigSpec { int type; /* Type of option, such as TK_CONFIG_COLOR; * see definitions below. Last option in table * must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */ |
︙ | |||
410 411 412 413 414 415 416 | 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | + - + + - + - + | * (internal-use-only flags are defined there). */ #define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1) #define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2) #define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) #ifndef TK_NO_DEPRECATED |
︙ | |||
672 673 674 675 676 677 678 | 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 | - + | typedef struct { int type; unsigned long serial; /* # of last request processed by server. */ Bool send_event; /* True if this came from a SendEvent * request. */ Display *display; /* Display the event was read from. */ Window event; /* Window on which event was requested. */ |
︙ | |||
742 743 744 745 746 747 748 | 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | - + + | (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) #define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) #define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE) #define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth) #define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight) |
︙ | |||
810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 | 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 | + + + | char *dummy19; /* privatePtr */ int internalBorderRight; int internalBorderTop; int internalBorderBottom; int minReqWidth; int minReqHeight; char *dummy20; /* geometryMaster */ #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS int dummy21; #endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */ } Tk_FakeWin; /* * Flag values for TkWindow (and Tk_FakeWin) structures are: * * TK_MAPPED: 1 means window is currently mapped, * 0 means unmapped. |
︙ | |||
911 912 913 914 915 916 917 | 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 | - + | typedef enum { TK_STATE_NULL = -1, TK_STATE_ACTIVE, TK_STATE_DISABLED, TK_STATE_NORMAL, TK_STATE_HIDDEN } Tk_State; typedef struct Tk_SmoothMethod { |
︙ | |||
1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 | 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 | - + + - + + + + - + | #endif /* USE_OLD_CANVAS */ typedef void (Tk_ItemDCharsProc)(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last); #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG typedef struct Tk_ItemType { |
︙ | |||
1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 | 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 | - + | typedef struct Tk_TSOffset { int flags; /* Flags; see below for possible values */ int xoffset; /* x offset */ int yoffset; /* y offset */ } Tk_TSOffset; /* |
︙ | |||
1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 | 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 | - - + + | typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, int argc, char **argv, Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master, ClientData *masterDataPtr); #else |
︙ | |||
1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 | 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 | - + | * image, etc.). It provides information common to all images of that type, * such as the type name and a collection of procedures in the image manager * that respond to various events. Each image manager is represented by one of * these structures. */ struct Tk_ImageType { |
︙ | |||
1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 | 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 | - + | /* * The following structure represents a particular file format for storing * images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.). It provides information to allow image * files of that format to be recognized and read into a photo image. */ struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat { |
︙ | |||
1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 | 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 | - + | */ typedef int (Tk_ErrorProc) (ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr); typedef void (Tk_EventProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GenericProc) (ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_ClientMessageProc) (Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr); typedef int (Tk_GetSelProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, |
︙ | |||
1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 | 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 | - + + | #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* USE_OLD_IMAGE */ /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra |
︙ | |||
1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 | 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 | + | # endif # define Tk_PhotoExpand Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize # undef Tk_PhotoSetSize # endif # define Tk_PhotoSetSize Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ #endif /* !TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* RC_INVOKED */ /* |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tk3d.h.
︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | - + - + | Screen *screen; /* Screen on which the border will be used. */ Visual *visual; /* Visual for all windows and pixmaps using * the border. */ int depth; /* Number of bits per pixel of drawables where * the border will be used. */ Colormap colormap; /* Colormap out of which pixels are * allocated. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkAtom.c.
︙ | |||
152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | - + | hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew); Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom)); if (mustFree) { XFree(mustFree); } name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr); hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew); |
︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | - + | } name = atomNameArray[atom - 1]; hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->nameTable, name, &isNew); Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, INT2PTR(atom)); name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&dispPtr->nameTable, hPtr); hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->atomTable, INT2PTR(atom), &isNew); |
Changes to generic/tkBind.c.
︙ | |||
683 684 685 686 687 688 689 | 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 | - - + + - + - + - + | #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP const KeySymInfo *kPtr; Tcl_InitHashTable(&keySymTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); Tcl_InitHashTable(&nameTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS); for (kPtr = keyArray; kPtr->name != NULL; kPtr++) { hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&keySymTable, kPtr->name, &newEntry); |
︙ | |||
1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 | 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 | + + + + + + + + + + | } } if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) || (eventPtr->type == FocusOut)) { if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior) { return; } } /* * Ignore event types which are not in flagArray and all zeroes there. * Most notably, NoExpose events can fill the ring buffer and disturb * (thus masking out) event sequences of interest. */ if ((eventPtr->type >= TK_LASTEVENT) || !flagArray[eventPtr->type]) { return; } dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr; bindInfoPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo; /* * Add the new event to the ring of saved events for the binding table. * Two tricky points: |
︙ | |||
1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 | 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 | - + + - + | if ((state & modMask) != modMask) { goto nextSequence; } } if (psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) { XEvent *firstPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent]; |
︙ | |||
1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 | 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 | + - + | KeySym keySym, /* KeySym: only relevant for KeyPress and * KeyRelease events). */ unsigned int scriptCount, /* The number of script-based binding patterns * matched so far for this event. */ Tcl_DString *dsPtr) /* Dynamic string in which to append new * command. */ { size_t spaceNeeded; |
︙ | |||
2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 | 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 | - + | * * CreateVirtualEvent -- * * Add a new definition for a virtual event. If the virtual event is * already defined, the new definition augments those that already exist. * * Results: |
︙ | |||
2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 | 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 | - + | * When constructing the event, * event.xany.serial is filled with the current X serial number. * event.xany.window is filled with the target window. * event.xany.display is filled with the target window's display. * Any other fields in eventPtr which are not specified by the pattern * string or the optional arguments, are set to 0. * |
︙ | |||
3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 | 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 | - + - + | } break; case EVENT_TIME: if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) { |
︙ | |||
3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 | 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 | + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + | /* * We only allow warping if the window is mapped. */ if ((warp != 0) && Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) { TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(event.general.xmotion.display); Tk_Window warpWindow = Tk_IdToWindow(dispPtr->display, event.general.xmotion.window); if (!(dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP)) { Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DoWarp, dispPtr); dispPtr->flags |= TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP; } if (warpWindow != dispPtr->warpWindow) { if (warpWindow) { Tcl_Preserve(warpWindow); } if (dispPtr->warpWindow) { Tcl_Release(dispPtr->warpWindow); } |
︙ | |||
3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 | 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 | + + + + + | if ((dispPtr->warpWindow == NULL) || (Tk_IsMapped(dispPtr->warpWindow) && (Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->warpWindow) != None))) { TkpWarpPointer(dispPtr); XForceScreenSaver(dispPtr->display, ScreenSaverReset); } if (dispPtr->warpWindow) { Tcl_Release(dispPtr->warpWindow); dispPtr->warpWindow = None; } dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP; } /* *------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * GetVirtualEventUid -- |
︙ | |||
3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 | 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 | - + | eventMask = eiPtr->eventMask; while ((*p == '-') || isspace(UCHAR(*p))) { p++; } p = GetField(p, field, FIELD_SIZE); } if (*field != '\0') { |
︙ | |||
4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 | 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Interpreter. */ { TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp); BindingTable *bindPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable; return &(bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent]); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * TkpCancelWarp -- * * This function cancels an outstanding pointer warp and * is called during tear down of the display. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ void TkpCancelWarp( TkDisplay *dispPtr) { if (dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP) { Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DoWarp, dispPtr); dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP; } } /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ |
Changes to generic/tkBusy.c.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | - - + + - - | */ #include "tkInt.h" #include "tkBusy.h" #include "default.h" /* |
︙ | |||
569 570 571 572 573 574 575 | 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 | - + | busyPtr->width = Tk_Width(tkRef); busyPtr->height = Tk_Height(tkRef); busyPtr->x = Tk_X(tkRef); busyPtr->y = Tk_Y(tkRef); busyPtr->cursor = None; Tk_SetClass(tkBusy, "Busy"); busyPtr->optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, busyOptionSpecs); |
︙ | |||
636 637 638 639 640 641 642 | 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 | - + | Tcl_Interp *interp, Busy *busyPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) { Tk_Cursor oldCursor = busyPtr->cursor; |
︙ | |||
759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 | 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | + + + | */ if (Tk_IsMapped(busyPtr->tkRef)) { TkpShowBusyWindow(busyPtr); } else { TkpHideBusyWindow(busyPtr); } if (result == TCL_OK) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(busyPtr->tkBusy), -1)); } return result; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_BusyObjCmd -- |
︙ | |||
792 793 794 795 796 797 798 | 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 | - + + - - + + | { Tk_Window tkwin = clientData; Tcl_HashTable *busyTablePtr = &((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->busyTable; Busy *busyPtr; Tcl_Obj *objPtr; int index, result = TCL_OK; static const char *const optionStrings[] = { |
︙ | |||
821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 | 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + | } if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, sizeof(char *), "option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } switch ((enum options) index) { case BUSY_BUSYWINDOW: if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window"); return TCL_ERROR; } busyPtr = GetBusy(interp, busyTablePtr, objv[2]); if (busyPtr == NULL) { Tcl_ResetResult(interp); return TCL_OK; } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(busyPtr->tkBusy), -1)); return TCL_OK; case BUSY_CGET: if (objc != 4) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window option"); return TCL_ERROR; } busyPtr = GetBusy(interp, busyTablePtr, objv[2]); if (busyPtr == NULL) { return TCL_ERROR; } Tcl_Preserve(busyPtr); |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkButton.c.
︙ | |||
745 746 747 748 749 750 751 | 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 | - + | butPtr->commandPtr = NULL; butPtr->flags = 0; Tk_CreateEventHandler(butPtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask, ButtonEventProc, butPtr); |
︙ | |||
806 807 808 809 810 811 812 | 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 | - + - + | switch (map[butPtr->type][index]) { case COMMAND_CGET: if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "cget option"); goto error; } |
︙ | |||
1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 | 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 | - + | for (error = 0; error <= 1; error++) { if (!error) { /* * First pass: set options to new values. */ |
︙ | |||
1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 | 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + | const char *name1, /* Name of variable. */ const char *name2, /* Second part of variable name. */ int flags) /* Information about what happened. */ { register TkButton *butPtr = clientData; const char *value; Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* * See ticket [5d991b82]. */ if (butPtr->selVarNamePtr == NULL) { if (!(flags & TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED)) { Tcl_UntraceVar2(interp, name1, name2, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS, ButtonVarProc, clientData); } return NULL; } /* * If the variable is being unset, then just re-establish the trace unless * the whole interpreter is going away. */ if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) { |
︙ | |||
1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 | 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 | - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | */ /* ARGSUSED */ static char * ButtonTextVarProc( ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvPs.c.
︙ | |||
487 488 489 490 491 492 493 | 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 | - + | /* * Insert the prolog */ Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, preambleObj); if (psInfo.chan != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 | 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 | - + | psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y, (Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr), psInfo.x2, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2, (Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr), psInfo.x, Tk_PostscriptY((double)psInfo.y2, (Tk_PostscriptInfo)psInfoPtr)); if (psInfo.chan != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
583 584 585 586 587 588 589 | 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 | - + - + | } Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "gsave\n", -1); Tcl_AppendObjToObj(psObj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)); Tcl_AppendToObj(psObj, "grestore\n", -1); if (psInfo.chan != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
821 822 823 824 825 826 827 | 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 | - + | */ Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); points = Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, &ds); fontname = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj(GetPostscriptBuffer(interp), "/%s findfont %d scalefont%s setfont\n", |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvText.c.
︙ | |||
1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 | 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 | - + + - + | Tk_Canvas canvas, /* Canvas containing text item. */ Tk_Item *itemPtr, /* Text item to be modified. */ int index, /* Character index before which string is to * be inserted. */ Tcl_Obj *obj) /* New characters to be inserted. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; |
︙ | |||
1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 | 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 | - + - + | * specified. */ Tcl_Obj *obj, /* Specification of a particular character in * itemPtr's text. */ int *indexPtr) /* Where to store converted character * index. */ { TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvUtil.c.
︙ | |||
1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 | 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 | + + - + | gcValues->fill_style = FillStippled; mask |= GCStipple|GCFillStyle; } } if (mask && (dash->number != 0)) { gcValues->line_style = LineOnOffDash; gcValues->dash_offset = outline->offset; if ((unsigned int)ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) { gcValues->dashes = dash->pattern.pt[0]; |
︙ | |||
1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 | 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 | + + - + | if (color==NULL) { return 0; } if ((dash->number > 2) || (dash->number < -1) || (dash->number==2 && (dash->pattern.array[0] != dash->pattern.array[1])) || ((dash->number == -1) && (dash->pattern.array[0] != ','))) { if ((unsigned int)ABS(dash->number) > sizeof(char *)) { dashList = dash->pattern.pt[0]; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCanvas.c.
︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | - - - + + + | * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ /* #define USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH 1 */ |
︙ | |||
264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 | 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 | + | Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const *argv); static void CanvasWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData); static int ConfigureCanvas(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const *argv, int flags); static void DestroyCanvas(char *memPtr); static int DrawCanvas(Tcl_Interp *interp, ClientData clientData, Tk_PhotoHandle photohandle, int subsample, int zoom); static void DisplayCanvas(ClientData clientData); static void DoItem(Tcl_Obj *accumObj, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Tk_Uid tag); static void EventuallyRedrawItem(TkCanvas *canvasPtr, Tk_Item *itemPtr); #ifdef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH static int FindItems(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkCanvas *canvasPtr, |
︙ | |||
801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 | 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 | + + | int index; static const char *const optionStrings[] = { "addtag", "bbox", "bind", "canvasx", "canvasy", "cget", "configure", "coords", "create", "dchars", "delete", "dtag", "find", "focus", "gettags", "icursor", "image", "imove", "index", "insert", "itemcget", "itemconfigure", "lower", "move", "moveto", "postscript", "raise", "rchars", "scale", "scan", "select", "type", "xview", "yview", NULL }; enum options { CANV_ADDTAG, CANV_BBOX, CANV_BIND, CANV_CANVASX, CANV_CANVASY, CANV_CGET, CANV_CONFIGURE, CANV_COORDS, CANV_CREATE, CANV_DCHARS, CANV_DELETE, CANV_DTAG, CANV_FIND, CANV_FOCUS, CANV_GETTAGS, CANV_ICURSOR, CANV_IMAGE, CANV_IMOVE, CANV_INDEX, CANV_INSERT, CANV_ITEMCGET, CANV_ITEMCONFIGURE, CANV_LOWER, CANV_MOVE, CANV_MOVETO, CANV_POSTSCRIPT, CANV_RAISE, CANV_RCHARS, CANV_SCALE, CANV_SCAN, CANV_SELECT, CANV_TYPE, CANV_XVIEW, CANV_YVIEW }; |
︙ | |||
1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 | 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 | - - + + | * modifications in the loop. */ tmpObj = Tcl_NewListObj(2, objv+4); FOR_EVERY_CANVAS_ITEM_MATCHING(objv[2], &searchPtr, goto doneImove) { int index; |
︙ | |||
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 | 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 | - + - + | */ x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1; x2 = itemPtr->x2; y2 = itemPtr->y2; itemPtr->redraw_flags &= ~TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW; ItemDelChars(canvasPtr, itemPtr, index, index); |
︙ | |||
1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 | 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 | - + - | size_t length; if (objc < 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type coords ?arg ...?"); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } |
︙ | |||
1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 | 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 | - + | EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr); canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED; Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(itemPtr->id)); break; } case CANV_DCHARS: { int first, last; |
︙ | |||
1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 | 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 | - + | } else { last = first; } /* * Redraw both item's old and new areas: it's possible that a * delete could result in a new area larger than the old area. |
︙ | |||
1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 | 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 | - + | goto done; } Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index)); break; } case CANV_INSERT: { int beforeThis; |
︙ | |||
1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 | 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 | - + + | } } RELINK_ITEMS(objv[2], prevPtr); break; } case CANV_RCHARS: { int first, last; |
︙ | |||
1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 | 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 | + - + + + - + + - + | * replace could result in a new area larger than the old area. * Except if the dCharsProc or insertProc sets the * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW flag, nothing more needs to be done. */ x1 = itemPtr->x1; y1 = itemPtr->y1; x2 = itemPtr->x2; y2 = itemPtr->y2; |
︙ | |||
2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 | 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | * (Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin) - 2*canvasPtr->inset)); } break; } CanvasSetOrigin(canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, newY); break; } case CANV_IMAGE: { Tk_PhotoHandle photohandle; int subsample = 1, zoom = 1; if (objc < 3 || objc > 5) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "imagename ?subsample? ?zoom?"); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } if ((photohandle = Tk_FindPhoto(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]) )) == 0) { result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } /* * If we are given a subsample or a zoom then grab them. */ if (objc >= 4 && Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &subsample) != TCL_OK) { result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } if (objc >= 5 && Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[4], &zoom) != TCL_OK) { result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } /* * Set the image size to zero, which allows the DrawCanvas() function * to expand the image automatically when it copies the pixmap into it. */ if (Tk_PhotoSetSize(interp, photohandle, 0, 0) != TCL_OK) { result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } result = DrawCanvas(interp, clientData, photohandle, subsample, zoom); } } done: #ifndef USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH TagSearchDestroy(searchPtr); #endif /* not USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH */ Tcl_Release(canvasPtr); |
︙ | |||
2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 | 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | canvasPtr->flags |= REPICK_NEEDED; Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw((Tk_Canvas) canvasPtr, canvasPtr->xOrigin, canvasPtr->yOrigin, canvasPtr->xOrigin + Tk_Width(canvasPtr->tkwin), canvasPtr->yOrigin + Tk_Height(canvasPtr->tkwin)); } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * DecomposeMaskToShiftAndBits -- * * Given a 32 bit pixel mask, we find the position of the lowest bit and the * width of the mask bits. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void DecomposeMaskToShiftAndBits( unsigned long mask, /* The pixel mask to examine */ int *shift, /* Where to put the shift count (position of lowest bit) */ int *bits) /* Where to put the bit count (width of the pixel mask) */ { int i; *shift = 0; *bits = 0; /* * Find the lowest '1' bit in the mask. */ for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i) { if (mask & 1 << i) break; } if (i < 32) { *shift = i; /* * Now find the next '0' bit and the width of the mask. */ for ( ; i < 32; ++i) { if ((mask & 1 << i) == 0) break; else ++*bits; } /* * Limit to the top 8 bits if the mask was wider than 8. */ if (*bits > 8) { *shift += *bits - 8; *bits = 8; } } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * DrawCanvas -- * * This function draws the contents of a canvas into the given Photo image. * This function is called from the widget "image" subcommand. * The canvas does not need to be mapped (one of it's ancestors must be) * in order for this function to work. * * Results: * None. * * Side effects: * Canvas contents from within the -scrollregion or widget size are rendered * into the Photo. Any errors are left in the result. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #define OVERDRAW_PIXELS 32 /* How much larger we make the pixmap * that the canvas objects are drawn into */ /* From stackoverflow.com/questions/2100331/c-macro-definition-to-determine-big-endian-or-little-endian-machine */ #define IS_BIG_ENDIAN (*(unsigned short *)"\0\xff" < 0x100) #define BYTE_SWAP16(n) ((((unsigned short)n)>>8) | (((unsigned short)n)<<8)) #define BYTE_SWAP32(n) (((n>>24)&0x000000FF) | ((n<<8)&0x00FF0000) | ((n>>8)&0x0000FF00) | ((n<<24)&0xFF000000)) static int DrawCanvas( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* As passed to the widget command, and we will leave errors here */ ClientData clientData, Tk_PhotoHandle photohandle, /* The photo we are rendering into */ int subsample, /* If either subsample or zoom are not 1 then we call Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock() */ int zoom) { TkCanvas * canvasPtr = clientData; Tk_Window tkwin; Display *displayPtr; Tk_PhotoImageBlock blockPtr = {0}; Window wid; Tk_Item * itemPtr; Pixmap pixmap = 0; XImage *ximagePtr = NULL; Visual *visualPtr; GC xgc = 0; XGCValues xgcValues; int canvasX1, canvasY1, canvasX2, canvasY2, cWidth, cHeight, pixmapX1, pixmapY1, pixmapX2, pixmapY2, pmWidth, pmHeight, bitsPerPixel, bytesPerPixel, x, y, result = TCL_OK, rshift, gshift, bshift, rbits, gbits, bbits; #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS char buffer[128]; #endif if ((tkwin = canvasPtr->tkwin) == NULL) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "canvas tkwin is NULL!", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } /* * If this canvas is unmapped, then we won't have a window id, so we will * try the ancestors of the canvas until we find a window that has a * valid window id. The Tk_GetPixmap() call requires a valid window id. */ do { if ((displayPtr = Tk_Display(tkwin)) == NULL) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "canvas (or parent) display is NULL!", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } if ((wid = Tk_WindowId(tkwin)) != 0) { continue; } if ((tkwin = Tk_Parent(tkwin)) == NULL) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "canvas has no parent with a valid window id! Is the toplevel window mapped?", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } } while (wid == 0); bitsPerPixel = Tk_Depth(tkwin); visualPtr = Tk_Visual(tkwin); if (subsample == 0) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "subsample cannot be zero", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } /* * Scan through the item list, registering the bounding box for all items * that didn't do that for the final coordinates yet. This can be * determined by the FORCE_REDRAW flag. */ for (itemPtr = canvasPtr -> firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = itemPtr -> nextPtr) { if (itemPtr -> redraw_flags & FORCE_REDRAW) { itemPtr -> redraw_flags &= ~FORCE_REDRAW; EventuallyRedrawItem(canvasPtr, itemPtr); itemPtr -> redraw_flags &= ~FORCE_REDRAW; } } /* * The DisplayCanvas() function works out the region that needs redrawing, * but we don't do this. We grab the whole scrollregion or canvas window * area. If we have a defined -scrollregion we use that as the drawing * region, otherwise use the canvas window height and width with an origin * of 0,0. */ if (canvasPtr->scrollX1 != 0 || canvasPtr->scrollY1 != 0 || canvasPtr->scrollX2 != 0 || canvasPtr->scrollY2 != 0) { canvasX1 = canvasPtr->scrollX1; canvasY1 = canvasPtr->scrollY1; canvasX2 = canvasPtr->scrollX2; canvasY2 = canvasPtr->scrollY2; cWidth = canvasX2 - canvasX1 + 1; cHeight = canvasY2 - canvasY1 + 1; } else { cWidth = Tk_Width(tkwin); cHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin); canvasX1 = 0; canvasY1 = 0; canvasX2 = canvasX1 + cWidth - 1; canvasY2 = canvasY1 + cHeight - 1; } /* * Allocate a pixmap to draw into. We add OVERDRAW_PIXELS in the same way * that DisplayCanvas() does to avoid problems on some systems when objects * are being drawn too close to the edge. */ pixmapX1 = canvasX1 - OVERDRAW_PIXELS; pixmapY1 = canvasY1 - OVERDRAW_PIXELS; pixmapX2 = canvasX2 + OVERDRAW_PIXELS; pixmapY2 = canvasY2 + OVERDRAW_PIXELS; pmWidth = pixmapX2 - pixmapX1 + 1; pmHeight = pixmapY2 - pixmapY1 + 1; if ((pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(displayPtr, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), pmWidth, pmHeight, bitsPerPixel)) == 0) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "failed to create drawing Pixmap", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } /* * Before we can draw the canvas objects into the pixmap it's background * should be filled with canvas background colour. */ xgcValues.function = GXcopy; xgcValues.foreground = Tk_3DBorderColor(canvasPtr->bgBorder)->pixel; xgc = XCreateGC(displayPtr, pixmap, GCFunction|GCForeground, &xgcValues); XFillRectangle(displayPtr,pixmap,xgc,0,0,pmWidth,pmHeight); /* * Draw all the cavas items into the pixmap */ canvasPtr->drawableXOrigin = pixmapX1; canvasPtr->drawableYOrigin = pixmapY1; for (itemPtr = canvasPtr->firstItemPtr; itemPtr != NULL; itemPtr = itemPtr->nextPtr) { if ((itemPtr->x1 >= pixmapX2) || (itemPtr->y1 >= pixmapY2) || (itemPtr->x2 < pixmapX1) || (itemPtr->y2 < pixmapY1)) { if (!AlwaysRedraw(itemPtr)) { continue; } } if (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN || (itemPtr->state == TK_STATE_NULL && canvasPtr->canvas_state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN)) { continue; } ItemDisplay(canvasPtr, itemPtr, pixmap, pixmapX1, pixmapY1, pmWidth, pmHeight); } /* * Copy the Pixmap into an ZPixmap format XImage so we can copy it across * to the photo image. This seems to be the only way to get Pixmap image * data out of an image. Note we have to account for the OVERDRAW_PIXELS * border width. */ if ((ximagePtr = XGetImage(displayPtr, pixmap, -pixmapX1, -pixmapY1, cWidth, cHeight, AllPlanes, ZPixmap)) == NULL) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "failed to copy Pixmap to XImage", NULL); result = TCL_ERROR; goto done; } #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ximagePtr {", NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->width); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " width ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->height); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " height ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->xoffset); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " xoffset ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->format); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " format ", buffer, NULL); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ximagePtr->data", NULL); if (ximagePtr->data != NULL) { int ix, iy; Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {", NULL); for (iy = 0; iy < ximagePtr->height; ++ iy) { Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {", NULL); for (ix = 0; ix < ximagePtr->bytes_per_line; ++ ix) { if (ix > 0) { if (ix % 4 == 0) Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-", NULL); else Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", NULL); } sprintf(buffer,"%2.2x",ximagePtr->data[ximagePtr->bytes_per_line * iy + ix]&0xFF); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL); } Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); } Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); } else sprintf(buffer," NULL"); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->byte_order); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " byte_order ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->bitmap_unit); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bitmap_unit ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->bitmap_bit_order); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bitmap_bit_order ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->bitmap_pad); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bitmap_pad ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->depth); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " depth ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->bytes_per_line); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bytes_per_line ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",ximagePtr->bits_per_pixel); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bits_per_pixel ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",ximagePtr->red_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " red_mask ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",ximagePtr->green_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " green_mask ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",ximagePtr->blue_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " blue_mask ", buffer, NULL); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\nvisualPtr {", NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",visualPtr->red_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " red_mask ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",visualPtr->green_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " green_mask ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"0x%8.8lx",visualPtr->blue_mask); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " blue_mask ", buffer, NULL); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); #endif /* * Fill in the PhotoImageBlock structure abd allocate a block of memory * for the converted image data. Note we allocate an alpha channel even * though we don't use one, because this layout helps Tk_PhotoPutBlock() * use memcpy() instead of the slow pixel or line copy. */ blockPtr.width = cWidth; blockPtr.height = cHeight; blockPtr.pixelSize = 4; blockPtr.pitch = blockPtr.pixelSize * blockPtr.width; blockPtr.offset[0] = 0; blockPtr.offset[1] = 1; blockPtr.offset[2] = 2; blockPtr.offset[3] = 3; blockPtr.pixelPtr = ckalloc(blockPtr.pixelSize * blockPtr.height * blockPtr.width); /* * Now convert the image data pixel by pixel from XImage to 32bit RGBA * format suitable for Tk_PhotoPutBlock(). */ DecomposeMaskToShiftAndBits(visualPtr->red_mask,&rshift,&rbits); DecomposeMaskToShiftAndBits(visualPtr->green_mask,&gshift,&gbits); DecomposeMaskToShiftAndBits(visualPtr->blue_mask,&bshift,&bbits); #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS sprintf(buffer,"%d",rshift); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\nbits { rshift ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",gshift); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " gshift ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",bshift); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bshift ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",rbits); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " rbits ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",gbits); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " gbits ", buffer, NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%d",bbits); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " bbits ", buffer, " }", NULL); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "\nConverted_image {", NULL); #endif /* Ok, had to use ximagePtr->bits_per_pixel here and in the switch (...) * below to get this to work on Windows. X11 correctly sets the bitmap *_pad and bitmap_unit fields to 32, but on Windows they are 0 and 8 * respectively! */ bytesPerPixel = ximagePtr->bits_per_pixel/8; for (y = 0; y < blockPtr.height; ++y) { #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " {", NULL); #endif for(x = 0; x < blockPtr.width; ++x) { unsigned long pixel = 0; switch (ximagePtr->bits_per_pixel) { /* * Get an 8 bit pixel from the XImage. */ case 8 : pixel = *((unsigned char *)(ximagePtr->data + bytesPerPixel * x + ximagePtr->bytes_per_line * y)); break; /* * Get a 16 bit pixel from the XImage, and correct the * byte order as necessary. */ case 16 : pixel = *((unsigned short *)(ximagePtr->data + bytesPerPixel * x + ximagePtr->bytes_per_line * y)); if ((IS_BIG_ENDIAN && ximagePtr->byte_order == LSBFirst) || (!IS_BIG_ENDIAN && ximagePtr->byte_order == MSBFirst)) pixel = BYTE_SWAP16(pixel); break; /* * Grab a 32 bit pixel from the XImage, and correct the * byte order as necessary. */ case 32 : pixel = *((unsigned long *)(ximagePtr->data + bytesPerPixel * x + ximagePtr->bytes_per_line * y)); if ((IS_BIG_ENDIAN && ximagePtr->byte_order == LSBFirst) || (!IS_BIG_ENDIAN && ximagePtr->byte_order == MSBFirst)) pixel = BYTE_SWAP32(pixel); break; } /* * We have a pixel with the correct byte order, so pull out the * colours and place them in the photo block. Perhaps we could * just not bother with the alpha byte because we are using * TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET later? * ***Windows: We have to swap the red and blue values. The * XImage storage is B - G - R - A which becomes a 32bit ARGB * quad. However the visual mask is a 32bit ABGR quad. And * Tk_PhotoPutBlock() wants R-G-B-A which is a 32bit ABGR quad. * If the visual mask was correct there would be no need to * swap anything here. */ #ifdef _WIN32 #define R_OFFSET 2 #define B_OFFSET 0 #else #define R_OFFSET 0 #define B_OFFSET 2 #endif blockPtr.pixelPtr[blockPtr.pitch * y + blockPtr.pixelSize * x + R_OFFSET] = (unsigned char)((pixel & visualPtr->red_mask) >> rshift); blockPtr.pixelPtr[blockPtr.pitch * y + blockPtr.pixelSize * x +1] = (unsigned char)((pixel & visualPtr->green_mask) >> gshift); blockPtr.pixelPtr[blockPtr.pitch * y + blockPtr.pixelSize * x + B_OFFSET] = (unsigned char)((pixel & visualPtr->blue_mask) >> bshift); blockPtr.pixelPtr[blockPtr.pitch * y + blockPtr.pixelSize * x +3] = 0xFF; #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS { int ix; if (x > 0) Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-", NULL); for (ix = 0; ix < 4; ++ix) { if (ix > 0) Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " ", NULL); sprintf(buffer,"%2.2x",blockPtr.pixelPtr[blockPtr.pitch * y + blockPtr.pixelSize * x + ix]&0xFF); Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, NULL); } } #endif } #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); #endif } #ifdef DEBUG_DRAWCANVAS Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " }", NULL); #endif /* * Now put the copied pixmap into the photo. * If either zoom or subsample are not 1, we use the zoom function. */ if (subsample != 1 || zoom != 1) { if ((result = Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, photohandle, &blockPtr, 0, 0, cWidth * zoom / subsample, cHeight * zoom / subsample, zoom, zoom, subsample, subsample, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET)) != TCL_OK) { goto done; } } else { if ((result = Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, photohandle, &blockPtr, 0, 0, cWidth, cHeight, TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET)) != TCL_OK) { goto done; } } /* * Clean up anything we have allocated and exit. */ done: if (blockPtr.pixelPtr) ckfree(blockPtr.pixelPtr); if (pixmap) Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap); if (ximagePtr) XDestroyImage(ximagePtr); if (xgc) XFreeGC(displayPtr,xgc); return result; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * DisplayCanvas -- * * This function redraws the contents of a canvas window. It is invoked * as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's nothing else |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkClipboard.c.
︙ | |||
445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 | - + + - + | const char *targetName = NULL; const char *formatName = NULL; const char *string; static const char *const appendOptionStrings[] = { "-displayof", "-format", "-type", NULL }; enum appendOptions { APPEND_DISPLAYOF, APPEND_FORMAT, APPEND_TYPE }; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkCmds.c.
︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | + | { static const char *const bellOptions[] = { "-displayof", "-nice", NULL }; enum options { TK_BELL_DISPLAYOF, TK_BELL_NICE }; Tk_Window tkwin = clientData; int i, index, nice = 0; Tk_ErrorHandler handler; if (objc > 4) { wrongArgs: Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?-displayof window? ?-nice?"); return TCL_ERROR; } |
︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 | + + | } break; case TK_BELL_NICE: nice = 1; break; } } handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(Tk_Display(tkwin), -1, -1, -1, NULL, NULL); XBell(Tk_Display(tkwin), 0); if (!nice) { XForceScreenSaver(Tk_Display(tkwin), ScreenSaverReset); } XFlush(Tk_Display(tkwin)); Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler); return TCL_OK; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_BindObjCmd -- |
︙ | |||
2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 | 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 | - + - + - + | * application associated with interp. On * output, filled with window specified as * option to "-displayof" argument, or * unmodified if "-displayof" argument was not * present. */ { const char *string; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkColor.c.
︙ | |||
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 | 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 | - - + | * Tk_GetColor. */ if (tkColPtr->magic != COLOR_MAGIC) { Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeColor called with bogus color"); } |
︙ | |||
583 584 585 586 587 588 589 | 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 | - - + | static void FreeColorObj( Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object we are releasing. */ { TkColor *tkColPtr = objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; if (tkColPtr != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
816 817 818 819 820 821 822 | 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 | - + - + | if (tkColPtr == NULL) { Tcl_Panic("TkDebugColor found empty hash table entry"); } for ( ; (tkColPtr != NULL); tkColPtr = tkColPtr->nextPtr) { Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkColor.h.
︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 | - + - + | * color and all other fields defaulted. May * be None. */ Screen *screen; /* Screen where this color is valid. Used to * delete it, and to find its display. */ Colormap colormap; /* Colormap from which this entry was * allocated. */ Visual *visual; /* Visual associated with colormap. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkConfig.c.
︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | - + - + - + - - + + - + | /* * One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has been * passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable. */ typedef struct OptionTable { |
︙ | |||
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | - + | * options. */ { Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr; int newEntry; OptionTable *tablePtr; const Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr, *specPtr2; Option *optionPtr; |
︙ | |||
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 | - + | * Get the custom parsing, etc., functions. */ optionPtr->extra.custom = specPtr->clientData; } } if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_STRING) |
︙ | |||
326 327 328 329 330 331 332 | 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 | - + - - + | void Tk_DeleteOptionTable( Tk_OptionTable optionTable) /* The option table to delete. */ { OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable; Option *optionPtr; |
︙ | |||
378 379 380 381 382 383 384 | 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 | - + | *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_InitOptions( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. NULL means * don't leave an error message. */ |
︙ | |||
549 550 551 552 553 554 555 | 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 | - + - + - + - - + + - - + + | */ static int DoObjConfig( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL, * then no message is left if an error * occurs. */ |
︙ | |||
653 654 655 656 657 658 659 | 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 | - + - + | *((double *) internalPtr) = newDbl; } break; } case TK_OPTION_STRING: { char *newStr; const char *value; |
︙ | |||
933 934 935 936 937 938 939 | 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 | - - - - + + - - + | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ObjectIsEmpty( Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* Object to test. May be NULL. */ { |
︙ | |||
974 975 976 977 978 979 980 | 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 | - + | const char *name, /* String balue to be looked up in the option * table. */ OptionTable *tablePtr) /* Table in which to look up name. */ { Option *bestPtr, *optionPtr; OptionTable *tablePtr2; const char *p1, *p2; |
︙ | |||
1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 | 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 | - + | *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ int Tk_SetOptions( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL, * then no error message is returned.*/ |
︙ | |||
1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 | 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 | - + - + - + - - + + - - + + - - + + - + | */ void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions( Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Holds saved option information; must have * been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */ { |
︙ | |||
1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 | 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 | - + | */ void Tk_FreeSavedOptions( Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr) /* Contains options saved in a previous call * to Tk_SetOptions. */ { |
︙ | |||
1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 | 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 | - + - + - + - - + + - - + + | * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ /* ARGSUSED */ void Tk_FreeConfigOptions( |
︙ | |||
1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 | 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 | - + - + - + | */ static void FreeResources( Option *optionPtr, /* Description of the configuration option. */ Tcl_Obj *objPtr, /* The current value of the option, specified * as an object. */ |
︙ | |||
1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 | 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 | - - | Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr); } break; case TK_OPTION_STYLE: if (internalFormExists) { Tk_FreeStyle(*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr)); *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = NULL; |
︙ | |||
1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 | 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 | - + - + | *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionInfo( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL, * then no error message is created. */ |
︙ | |||
1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 | 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 | - + | * Memory is allocated. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * GetConfigList( |
︙ | |||
1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 | 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 | - - + + | } else if (optionPtr->defaultPtr != NULL) { elementPtr = optionPtr->defaultPtr; } else { elementPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); } Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, listPtr, elementPtr); |
︙ | |||
1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 | 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 | - + - + - + | * None. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static Tcl_Obj * GetObjectForOption( |
︙ | |||
2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 | 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 | - + - - + + | */ Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionValue( Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL * then no messages are provided for * errors. */ |
︙ | |||
2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 | 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 | - + - + | for (hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&tsdPtr->hashTable, &search); hashEntryPtr != NULL; hashEntryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) { if (tablePtr == (OptionTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr)) { for ( ; tablePtr != NULL; tablePtr = tablePtr->nextPtr) { Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkConsole.c.
︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | - + | * console. A refCount permits the struct to be shared as instance data * by commands and by channels. */ typedef struct ConsoleInfo { Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp; /* Interpreter displaying the console. */ Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interpreter controlled by console. */ |
︙ | |||
219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 | - + | ConsoleInfo *info; Tcl_Channel consoleChannel; /* * Ensure that we are getting a compatible version of Tcl. */ |
︙ | |||
314 315 316 317 318 319 320 | 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 | - + | /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Tk_CreateConsoleWindow -- * * Initialize the console. This code actually creates a new application |
︙ | |||
340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 | 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | + + + + | Tcl_Command token; int result = TCL_OK; int haveConsoleChannel = 1; /* Init an interp with Tcl and Tk */ Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp = Tcl_CreateInterp(); if (Tcl_Init(consoleInterp) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Obj *result_obj = Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result_obj); goto error; } if (Tk_Init(consoleInterp) != TCL_OK) { Tcl_Obj *result_obj = Tcl_GetObjResult(consoleInterp); Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, result_obj); goto error; } /* * Fetch the instance data from whatever std channel is a * console channel. If none, create fresh instance data. */ |
︙ | |||
448 449 450 451 452 453 454 | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 | - + | Tcl_Release(consoleInterp); if (result == TCL_ERROR) { Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(interp, token); mainWindow = Tk_MainWindow(interp); if (mainWindow) { Tk_DeleteEventHandler(mainWindow, StructureNotifyMask, ConsoleEventProc, info); |
︙ | |||
588 589 590 591 592 593 594 | 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 | - + | ClientData instanceData, /* Unused. */ Tcl_Interp *interp) /* Unused. */ { ChannelData *data = instanceData; ConsoleInfo *info = data->info; if (info) { |
︙ | |||
877 878 879 880 881 882 883 | 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 | - + | { ConsoleInfo *info = clientData; if (info->consoleInterp == interp) { Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler(DeleteConsoleInterp, info->consoleInterp); info->consoleInterp = NULL; } |
︙ | |||
908 909 910 911 912 913 914 | 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 | - + | ClientData clientData) { ConsoleInfo *info = clientData; if (info->consoleInterp) { Tcl_DeleteInterp(info->consoleInterp); } |
︙ | |||
945 946 947 948 949 950 951 | 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 | - + | ConsoleInfo *info = clientData; Tcl_Interp *consoleInterp = info->consoleInterp; if (consoleInterp && !Tcl_InterpDeleted(consoleInterp)) { Tcl_EvalEx(consoleInterp, "tk::ConsoleExit", -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL); } |
Changes to generic/tkCursor.c.
︙ | |||
459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 | - - + | static void FreeCursor( TkCursor *cursorPtr) /* Cursor to be released. */ { TkCursor *prevPtr; |
︙ | |||
586 587 588 589 590 591 592 | 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 | - - + | static void FreeCursorObj( Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object we are releasing. */ { TkCursor *cursorPtr = objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; if (cursorPtr != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
860 861 862 863 864 865 866 | 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 | - + - + | cursorPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); if (cursorPtr == NULL) { Tcl_Panic("TkDebugCursor found empty hash table entry"); } for ( ; (cursorPtr != NULL); cursorPtr = cursorPtr->nextPtr) { objPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
Changes to generic/tkDecls.h.
︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | + + + + + + + + | #define _TKDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif #if !defined(BUILD_tk) # define TK_DEPRECATED(msg) EXTERN TCL_DEPRECATED_API(msg) #elif defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) # define TK_DEPRECATED(msg) MODULE_SCOPE #else # define TK_DEPRECATED(msg) EXTERN #endif /* * WARNING: This file is automatically generated by the tools/genStubs.tcl * script. Any modifications to the function declarations below should be made * in the generic/tk.decls script. */ /* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */ |
︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | - + | /* 17 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin(Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 18 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 19 */ |
︙ | |||
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 | - + | EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, const char *argvName, int flags); /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, |
︙ | |||
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 | 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 | - + | EXTERN void Tk_DeleteImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 53 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteSelHandler(Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 54 */ EXTERN void Tk_DestroyWindow(Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */ |
︙ | |||
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 | 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 | + - + - + - + | char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap(Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout(Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 77 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function does nothing, call can be removed") |
︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 | - + | EXTERN Tk_Image Tk_GetImage(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *name, Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 98 */ EXTERN ClientData Tk_GetImageMasterData(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, |
︙ | |||
372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 | - + | EXTERN int Tk_GetRelief(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name, int *reliefPtr); /* 107 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetRootCoords(Tk_Window tkwin, int *xPtr, int *yPtr); /* 108 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, |
︙ | |||
434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 | - + - + - + - + - + - + - - + - + - + - + - + - + + - + + - + + - + + - + | EXTERN void Tk_MoveResizeWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 128 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 130 */ |
︙ | |||
616 617 618 619 620 621 622 | 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 | - + | Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 195 */ |
︙ | |||
638 639 640 641 642 643 644 | 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 | - + - + - + - + | /* 201 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 202 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 203 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 204 */ |
︙ | |||
772 773 774 775 776 777 778 | 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | + - + + - + | /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize(Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 246 */ TK_DEPRECATED("function signature changed") |
︙ | |||
814 815 816 817 818 819 820 | 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 | - + - + - + - + | /* 259 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 260 */ EXTERN Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement(Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 261 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementSize(Tk_Style style, |
︙ | |||
891 892 893 894 895 896 897 | 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 | - + - + | int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor *colorPtr); /* 12 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); /* 13 */ void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 14 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); /* 15 */ double (*tk_CanvasPsY) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); /* 16 */ void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 17 */ int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, const char *value, char *widgRec, int offset); /* 18 */ |
︙ | |||
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 | 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 | - + | void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 48 */ void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); /* 49 */ void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 50 */ void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc *proc, ClientData clientData); /* 51 */ void (*tk_DeleteImage) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name); /* 52 */ void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 53 */ void (*tk_DestroyWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 54 */ |
︙ | |||
949 950 951 952 953 954 955 | 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 | - + - - + + - + - + | void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display *display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */ void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */ void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display *display, GC gc); /* 72 */ void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */ void (*tk_FreeOptions) (const Tk_ConfigSpec *specs, char *widgRec, Display *display, int needFlags); /* 74 */ void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display *display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */ void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */ |
︙ | |||
1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 | 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 | - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - - + + + - + - + | void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 123 */ void (*tk_ManageGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr, ClientData clientData); /* 124 */ void (*tk_MapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 125 */ int (*tk_MeasureChars) (Tk_Font tkfont, const char *source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int *lengthPtr); /* 126 */ void (*tk_MoveResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 127 */ void (*tk_MoveWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 128 */ void (*tk_MoveToplevelWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */ |
︙ | |||
1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 | 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 | - + - - + + - + - + | Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 188 */ Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 189 */ Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) (Tcl_Interp *interp, const Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr); /* 190 */ void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 191 */ void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 192 */ void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 193 */ void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr); /* 194 */ |
︙ | |||
1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 | - - + + - - - - + + + + | void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 239 */ void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc); /* 240 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window parent, const char *screenName); /* 241 */ void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, const Tk_ClassProcs *procs, ClientData instanceData); /* 242 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */ void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */ void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */ |
︙ | |||
1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 | 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ /* Functions that don't belong in the stub table */ #undef Tk_MainEx #undef Tk_Init #undef Tk_SafeInit #undef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow #undef Tk_FreeXId #define Tk_FreeXId(display,xid) #undef Tk_GetStyleFromObj #undef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj(obj) Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(NULL, obj) #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(obj) /* no-op */ #if defined(_WIN32) && defined(UNICODE) # define Tk_MainEx Tk_MainExW EXTERN void Tk_MainExW(int argc, wchar_t **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp); #endif #if defined(TK_NO_DEPRECATED) || TCL_MAJOR_VERSION > 8 #undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite #undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite #undef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic #undef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* TK_NO_DEPRECATED */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* _TKDECLS */ |
Changes to generic/tkEntry.c.
︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | - + | * Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #include "tkInt.h" |
︙ | |||
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | + + + + + + | {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand", DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-placeholder", "placeHolder", "PlaceHolder", DEF_ENTRY_PLACEHOLDER, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, placeholderString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-placeholderforeground", "placeholderForeground", "PlaceholderForeground", DEF_ENTRY_PLACEHOLDERFG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, placeholderColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground", "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground", |
︙ | |||
254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 | 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 | + + + + + + | {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand", DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-invcmd", NULL, NULL, NULL, 0, -1, 0, "-invalidcommand", 0}, {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify", DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-placeholder", "placeHolder", "PlaceHolder", DEF_ENTRY_PLACEHOLDER, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, placeholderString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-placeholderforeground", "placeholderForeground", "PlaceholderForeground", DEF_ENTRY_PLACEHOLDERFG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, placeholderColorPtr), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief", DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 0, 0, 0}, {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground", "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0}, {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay", |
︙ | |||
533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 | 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 | + + - + | entryPtr->inset = XPAD; entryPtr->textGC = None; entryPtr->selTextGC = None; entryPtr->highlightGC = None; entryPtr->avgWidth = 1; entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE; entryPtr->placeholderGC = None; /* * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the entry, * otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it. */ Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr->tkwin); Tk_SetClass(entryPtr->tkwin, "Entry"); Tk_SetClassProcs(entryPtr->tkwin, &entryClass, entryPtr); Tk_CreateEventHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask, EntryEventProc, entryPtr); Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING, EntryFetchSelection, entryPtr, XA_STRING); |
︙ | |||
636 637 638 639 640 641 642 | 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 | - + - + | case COMMAND_CGET: if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option"); goto error; } |
︙ | |||
883 884 885 886 887 888 889 | 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 | - + + | entryPtr->selectFirst = -1; entryPtr->selectLast = -1; } else { entryPtr->selectFirst = index; entryPtr->selectLast = index2; } if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION) |
︙ | |||
1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 | - + - + | } /* * Store old values that we need to effect certain behavior if they change * value. */ |
︙ | |||
1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 | 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 | - - - - + + + + + + - - - + + + | } if (entryPtr->insertBorderWidth > entryPtr->insertWidth/2) { entryPtr->insertBorderWidth = entryPtr->insertWidth/2; } if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) { if (sbPtr->fromValue > sbPtr->toValue) { |
︙ | |||
1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 | 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 | + | } /* * Claim the selection if we've suddenly started exporting it. */ if (entryPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport) && (!Tcl_IsSafe(entryPtr->interp)) && (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1) && !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) { Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection, entryPtr); entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION; } |
︙ | |||
1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 | 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 | + + + + + + + + + + + + | gcValues.graphics_exposures = False; mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures; gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); if (entryPtr->textGC != None) { Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->textGC); } entryPtr->textGC = gc; if (entryPtr->placeholderColorPtr != NULL) { gcValues.foreground = entryPtr->placeholderColorPtr->pixel; } mask = GCForeground | GCFont | GCGraphicsExposures; gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); if (entryPtr->placeholderGC != None) { Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->placeholderGC); } entryPtr->placeholderGC = gc; if (entryPtr->selFgColorPtr != NULL) { gcValues.foreground = entryPtr->selFgColorPtr->pixel; } else { gcValues.foreground = colorPtr->pixel; } gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(entryPtr->tkfont); mask = GCForeground | GCFont; gc = Tk_GetGC(entryPtr->tkwin, mask, &gcValues); if (entryPtr->selTextGC != None) { Tk_FreeGC(entryPtr->display, entryPtr->selTextGC); } |
︙ | |||
1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 | 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 | + - + + + + + + | } /* * Draw the text in two pieces: first the unselected portion, then the * selected portion on top of it. */ if ((entryPtr->numChars != 0) || (entryPtr->placeholderChars == 0)) { |
︙ | |||
1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 | 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 | - - + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | /* * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of the * entry, recompute the displayString. */ if (entryPtr->showChar != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 | 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 | - - - + | InsertChars( Entry *entryPtr, /* Entry that is to get the new elements. */ int index, /* Add the new elements before this character * index. */ const char *value) /* New characters to add (NULL-terminated * string). */ { |
︙ | |||
2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 | 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 | - + + | { int newFirst, newLast; /* * Grab the selection if we don't own it already. */ |
︙ | |||
2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 | 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 | - + + | * not including terminating NUL character. */ { Entry *entryPtr = clientData; int byteCount; const char *string; const char *selStart, *selEnd; |
︙ | |||
2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 | 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 | - + + | * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for the * next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, we need to clear the * selection since it is always visible. * This is controlled by ::tk::AlwaysShowSelection. */ if (TkpAlwaysShowSelection(entryPtr->tkwin) |
︙ | |||
3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 | 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 | - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + | */ /* ARGSUSED */ static char * EntryTextVarProc( ClientData clientData, /* Information about button. */ Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Interpreter containing variable. */ |
︙ | |||
3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 | 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 | - + | * EntryValidateChange -- * * This function is invoked when any character is added or removed from * the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation. * * Results: * TCL_OK if the validatecommand accepts the new string, TCL_ERROR if any |
︙ | |||
3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 | 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 | - + | p = Tcl_DStringValue(&script); code = EntryValidate(entryPtr, p); Tcl_DStringFree(&script); /* * If e->validate has become VALIDATE_NONE during the validation, or we * now have VALIDATE_VAR set (from EntrySetValue) and didn't before, it |
︙ | |||
3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 | 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 | - + | Tcl_DString *dsPtr) /* Dynamic string in which to append new * command. */ { int spaceNeeded, cvtFlags; /* Used to substitute string as proper Tcl * list element. */ int number, length; register const char *string; |
︙ | |||
3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 | 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 | - + - + | /* * There's a percent sequence here. Process it. */ before++; /* skip over % */ if (*before != '\0') { |
︙ | |||
3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 | 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 | - + | break; } break; case 'W': /* widget name */ string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin); break; default: |
︙ | |||
3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 | 3738 3739 3740 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 | + + - + | sbPtr->fromValue = 0.0; sbPtr->toValue = 100.0; sbPtr->increment = 1.0; sbPtr->formatBuf = ckalloc(TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE); sbPtr->bdRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; sbPtr->buRelief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT; entryPtr->placeholderGC = None; /* * Keep a hold of the associated tkwin until we destroy the spinbox, * otherwise Tk might free it while we still need it. */ Tcl_Preserve(entryPtr->tkwin); Tk_SetClass(entryPtr->tkwin, "Spinbox"); Tk_SetClassProcs(entryPtr->tkwin, &entryClass, entryPtr); Tk_CreateEventHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, PointerMotionMask|ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask, EntryEventProc, entryPtr); Tk_CreateSelHandler(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING, EntryFetchSelection, entryPtr, XA_STRING); |
︙ | |||
3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 | 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 | - + - + | case SB_CMD_CGET: if (objc != 3) { Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option"); goto error; } |
︙ | |||
4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 | 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 | - + + | entryPtr->selectFirst = -1; entryPtr->selectLast = -1; } else { entryPtr->selectFirst = index; entryPtr->selectLast = index2; } if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION) |
︙ | |||
4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 | 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 | + - + - + - + | if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objPtr), entryPtr->string)) { /* * Somehow the string changed from what we expected, so let's * do a search on the list to see if the current value is * there. If not, move to the first element of the list. */ int i, listc; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkEntry.h.
︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 | 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | + + + + + + + + + + + + + | * scrollbar(s). Malloc'ed. NULL means no * command to issue. */ char *showChar; /* Value of -show option. If non-NULL, first * character is used for displaying all * characters in entry. Malloc'ed. This is * only used by the Entry widget. */ /* * Fields used in displaying help text if entry value is empty */ Tk_TextLayout placeholderLayout;/* Cached placeholder text layout information. */ char *placeholderString; /* String value of placeholder. */ int placeholderChars; /* Number of chars in placeholder. */ XColor *placeholderColorPtr;/* Color value of placeholder foreground. */ GC placeholderGC; /* For drawing placeholder text. */ int placeholderX; /* Origin for layout. */ int placeholderLeftIndex; /* Character index of left-most character * visible in window. */ /* * Fields whose values are derived from the current values of the * configuration settings above. */ const char *displayString; /* String to use when displaying. This may be * a pointer to string, or a pointer to |
︙ | |||
217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | - + | * multiple of this value. */ char *formatBuf; /* string into which to format value. * Malloc'ed. */ char *reqFormat; /* Sprintf conversion specifier used for the * value that the users requests. Malloc'ed */ char *valueFormat; /* Sprintf conversion specifier used for the * value. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkError.c.
︙ | |||
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | - - + + | * request code (-1 means consider all minor * codes). */ Tk_ErrorProc *errorProc, /* Procedure to invoke when a matching error * occurs. NULL means just ignore matching * errors. */ ClientData clientData) /* Arbitrary value to pass to errorProc. */ { |
︙ | |||
143 144 145 146 147 148 149 | 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | - - + + - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + - - + | */ void Tk_DeleteErrorHandler( Tk_ErrorHandler handler) /* Token for handler to delete; was previous * return value from Tk_CreateErrorHandler. */ { |
︙ | |||
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | - + - - + + | * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ static int ErrorProc( Display *display, /* Display for which error occurred. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkEvent.c.
︙ | |||
352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 | 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | + | } if (winPtr->inputContext == NULL) { /* XCreateIC failed. */ return; } winPtr->ximGeneration = dispPtr->ximGeneration; /* * Adjust the window's event mask if the IM requires it. */ XGetICValues(winPtr->inputContext, XNFilterEvents, &im_event_mask, NULL); if ((winPtr->atts.event_mask & im_event_mask) != im_event_mask) { winPtr->atts.event_mask |= im_event_mask; |
︙ | |||
1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 | 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 | + + + + + + + + + + - + | * Create the input context for the window if it hasn't already been done * (XFilterEvent needs this context). When the event is a FocusIn event, * set the input context focus to the receiving window. This code is only * ever active for X11. */ #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS /* * If the XIC has been invalidated, it must be recreated. */ if (winPtr->dispPtr->ximGeneration != winPtr->ximGeneration) { winPtr->flags &= ~TK_CHECKED_IC; winPtr->inputContext = NULL; } if ((winPtr->dispPtr->flags & TK_DISPLAY_USE_IM)) { if (!(winPtr->flags & (TK_CHECKED_IC|TK_ALREADY_DEAD))) { winPtr->flags |= TK_CHECKED_IC; if (winPtr->dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) { CreateXIC(winPtr); } } if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) && (winPtr->dispPtr->inputMethod != NULL) && |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFont.c.
︙ | |||
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | - + | /* * The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes * for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted * when the last reference to it goes away. */ typedef struct NamedFont { |
︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 | - + | */ const Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = { "font", /* name */ FreeFontObjProc, /* freeIntRepProc */ DupFontObjProc, /* dupIntRepProc */ NULL, /* updateStringProc */ |
︙ | |||
493 494 495 496 497 498 499 | 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 | - + | switch ((enum options) index) { case FONT_ACTUAL: { int skip, result, n; const char *s; Tk_Font tkfont; Tcl_Obj *optPtr, *charPtr, *resultPtr; |
︙ | |||
558 559 560 561 562 563 564 | 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 | + + - + + - + - | } /* * The 'charPtr' arg must be a single Unicode. */ if (charPtr != NULL) { const char *string = Tcl_GetString(charPtr); size_t len = TkUtfToUniChar(string, &uniChar); |
︙ | |||
706 707 708 709 710 711 712 | 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 | - + + - + | } TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin); break; } case FONT_MEASURE: { const char *string; Tk_Font tkfont; |
︙ | |||
1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 | 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 | - + | /* * Get information used for drawing underlines in generic code on a * non-underlined font. */ descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; fontPtr->underlinePos = descent / 2; |
︙ | |||
1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 | 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 | - - + - - + | { TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont, *prevPtr; NamedFont *nfPtr; if (fontPtr == NULL) { return; } |
︙ | |||
1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 | 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 | - + - | static void FreeFontObj( Tcl_Obj *objPtr) /* The object we are releasing. */ { TkFont *fontPtr = objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
︙ | |||
1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 | 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 | - + - + - + | } else if (strcasecmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0) { family = "AvantGarde"; } else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfChancery") == 0) { family = "ZapfChancery"; } else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfDingbats") == 0) { family = "ZapfDingbats"; } else { |
︙ | |||
1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 | 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 | - + | Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, weightString, -1); } if (slantString != NULL) { Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, slantString, -1); } } |
︙ | |||
3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 | 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 | - - - - - - + + + + + + - - | continue; } cx[0] = cx[3] = chunkPtr->x; cy[0] = cy[1] = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent; cx[1] = cx[2] = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->displayWidth; cy[2] = cy[3] = chunkPtr->y + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
︙ | |||
3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 | 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 | - + + - + | Tcl_Interp *interp, /* Filled with Postscript code. */ Tk_TextLayout layout) /* The layout to be rendered. */ { TextLayout *layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; LayoutChunk *chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; int baseline = chunkPtr->y; Tcl_Obj *psObj = Tcl_NewObj(); |
︙ | |||
3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 | 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 | - + | /* * INTL: We only handle symbols that have an encoding as a glyph * from the standard set defined by Adobe. The rest get punted. * Eventually this should be revised to handle more sophsticiated * international postscript fonts. */ |
︙ | |||
3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 | 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 | + + + - + + | } /* * This character doesn't belong to the ASCII character set, so we * use the full glyph name. */ if (ch > 0xffff) { goto noMapping; } sprintf(uindex, "%04X", ch); /* endianness? */ glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "::tk::psglyphs", uindex, 0); if (glyphname) { |
︙ | |||
3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 | 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 | - + | value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr); faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value); break; case FONT_SIZE: if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } |
︙ | |||
3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 | 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 | + - + + + + | switch (i) { case FONT_FAMILY: str = faPtr->family; valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1)); break; case FONT_SIZE: if (faPtr->size >= 0.0) { |
︙ | |||
3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 | 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 | - + | } faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[0])); if (objc > 1) { if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &n) != TCL_OK) { return TCL_ERROR; } |
︙ | |||
3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 | 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 | - + - + - - + + | /* XLFD_ADD_STYLE ignored. */ /* * Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel for * historical compatibility. */ |
︙ | |||
3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 | 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 | - + + - + + | * [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ] * * where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 are some * additional numbers that I don't know the purpose of, so I * ignore them. */ |
︙ | |||
3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 | 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 | - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + | * * Side effects: * None. * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ |
︙ | |||
4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 | 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 | - + - + | fontPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); if (fontPtr == NULL) { Tcl_Panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry"); } for ( ; (fontPtr != NULL); fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { objPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFont.h.
︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | - + | * used to keep track of either the desired attributes or the actual * attributes gotten when the font was instantiated. */ struct TkFontAttributes { Tk_Uid family; /* Font family, or NULL to represent plaform- * specific default system font. */ |
︙ | |||
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | - + - + | */ typedef struct TkFont { /* * Fields used and maintained exclusively by generic code. */ |
︙ | |||
194 195 196 197 198 199 200 | 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | - - + + | #define TkInitFontAttributes(fa) memset((fa), 0, sizeof(TkFontAttributes)); #define TkInitXLFDAttributes(xa) memset((xa), 0, sizeof(TkXLFDAttributes)); MODULE_SCOPE int TkFontParseXLFD(const char *string, TkFontAttributes *faPtr, TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr); MODULE_SCOPE const char *const * TkFontGetAliasList(const char *faceName); MODULE_SCOPE const char *const *const * TkFontGetFallbacks(void); |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkFrame.c.
︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | - - + + | * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ |
︙ | |||
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 | - | Tcl_Obj *listObj, /* List of arguments. */ int toplevel, /* Non-zero means create a toplevel window, * zero means create a frame. */ Tcl_Obj *nameObj) /* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main * window associated with the interpreter. * Gives the base name to use for the new * application. */ |
︙ | |||
485 486 487 488 489 490 491 | 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 | - + + | { Tk_Window tkwin; Frame *framePtr; Tk_OptionTable optionTable; Tk_Window newWin; const char *className, *screenName, *visualName, *colormapName; const char *arg, *useOption; |
︙ | |||
512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 | - + - + - + - + - + - + | * be processed specially, before the window is configured using the usual * Tk mechanisms. */ className = colormapName = screenName = visualName = useOption = NULL; colormap = None; for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) { |
︙ | |||
679 680 681 682 683 684 685 | 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 | - + | Tk_SetClassProcs(newWin, &frameClass, framePtr); mask = ExposureMask | StructureNotifyMask | FocusChangeMask; if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) { mask |= ActivateMask; } Tk_CreateEventHandler(newWin, mask, FrameEventProc, framePtr); |
︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 | - + + - + - + - + | "cget", "configure", NULL }; enum options { FRAME_CGET, FRAME_CONFIGURE }; register Frame *framePtr = clientData; int result = TCL_OK, index; |
︙ | |||
957 958 959 960 961 962 963 | 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 | - + | oldMenuName = ckalloc(strlen(framePtr->menuName) + 1); strcpy(oldMenuName, framePtr->menuName); } if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) { oldWindow = labelframePtr->labelWin; } |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGC.c.
︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | - + | * values in the graphics context and the other based on the display and GC * identifier. */ typedef struct { GC gc; /* Graphics context. */ Display *display; /* Display to which gc belongs. */ |
︙ | |||
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 | 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 | - - + - | } idHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, (char *) gc); if (idHashPtr == NULL) { Tcl_Panic("Tk_FreeGC received unknown gc argument"); } gcPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(idHashPtr); |
︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 | - - - - - - | Tcl_HashSearch search; TkGC *gcPtr; for (entryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&dispPtr->gcIdTable, &search); entryPtr != NULL; entryPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) { gcPtr = Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr); |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGrab.c.
︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 | - + | Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) /* Argument objects. */ { int globalGrab; Tk_Window tkwin; TkDisplay *dispPtr; const char *arg; int index; |
︙ | |||
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 | 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 | - + | return TCL_ERROR; } /* * First check for a window name or "-global" as the first argument. */ |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkGrid.c.
︙ | |||
1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 | 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 | - + - - - | int width, height; /* Requested size of layout, in pixels. */ int realWidth, realHeight; /* Actual size layout should take-up. */ int usedX, usedY; masterPtr->flags &= ~REQUESTED_RELAYOUT; /* |
︙ | |||
2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 | 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 | + + + + | SetGridSize(slavePtr->masterPtr); slavePtr->masterPtr = NULL; /* * If we have emptied this master from slaves it means we are no longer * handling it and should mark it as free. * * Send the event "NoManagedChild" to the master to inform it about there * being no managed children inside it. */ if ((masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL) && (masterPtr->flags & ALLOCED_MASTER)) { TkFreeGeometryMaster(masterPtr->tkwin, "grid"); masterPtr->flags &= ~ALLOCED_MASTER; TkSendVirtualEvent(masterPtr->tkwin, "NoManagedChild", NULL); } } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- * * DestroyGrid -- |
︙ | |||
2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 | 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 | - + - - - - - - + + + + + + + - + - - - + + + | if (!(gridPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) { gridPtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width; gridPtr->masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT; Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, gridPtr->masterPtr); } } } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) { |
︙ | |||
2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 | 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 | - + - + | /* * Count the number of windows, or window short-cuts. */ firstChar = 0; for (numWindows=0, i=0; i < objc; i++) { |
︙ | |||
3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 | 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 | - + + | return TCL_ERROR; } defaultRow = tmp; } } /* |
︙ | |||
3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 | 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 | + + + | parent = Tk_Parent(slave); if (masterPtr == NULL) { masterPtr = GetGrid(parent); InitMasterData(masterPtr); } if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL && slavePtr->masterPtr != masterPtr) { if (slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin != Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) { Tk_UnmaintainGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, slavePtr->masterPtr->tkwin); } Unlink(slavePtr); slavePtr->masterPtr = NULL; } if (slavePtr->masterPtr == NULL) { Gridder *tempPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; |
︙ | |||
3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 | 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 | + + + + | return TCL_ERROR; } SetGridSize(masterPtr); /* * If we have emptied this master from slaves it means we are no longer * handling it and should mark it as free. * * Send the event "NoManagedChild" to the master to inform it about there * being no managed children inside it. */ if (masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL && masterPtr->flags & ALLOCED_MASTER) { TkFreeGeometryMaster(masterPtr->tkwin, "grid"); masterPtr->flags &= ~ALLOCED_MASTER; TkSendVirtualEvent(masterPtr->tkwin, "NoManagedChild", NULL); } return TCL_OK; } /* *---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgBmap.c.
︙ | |||
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | - + | /* * The following data structure represents all of the instances of an image * that lie within a particular window: */ typedef struct BitmapInstance { |
︙ | |||
947 948 949 950 951 952 953 | 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 | - - + | ClientData clientData, /* Pointer to BitmapInstance structure for * instance to be displayed. */ Display *display) /* Display containing window that used image. */ { BitmapInstance *instancePtr = clientData; BitmapInstance *prevPtr; |
︙ | |||
1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 | 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 | - + - + | */ static int GetByte( Tcl_Channel chan) /* The channel we read from. */ { char buffer; |
︙ |
Changes to generic/tkImgGIF.c.
︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 | - + | * state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF. */ typedef struct mFile { unsigned char *data; /* mmencoded source string */ int c; /* bits left over from previous character */ int state; /* decoder state (0-4 or GIF_DONE) */ |
︙ | |||
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | - - + + | } GIFImageConfig; /* * Type of a function used to do the writing to a file or buffer when * serializing in the GIF format. */ |
︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | - + - + - + | unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4], int srcX, int srcY, int interlace, int transparent); /* * these are for the BASE64 image reader code only */ |
︙ | |||
753 754 755 756 757 758 759 | 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 | - + - + | Tcl_Obj *dataObj, /* the object containing the image data */ Tcl_Obj *format, /* the image format object, or NULL */ int *widthPtr, /* where to put the string width */ int *heightPtr, /* where to put the string height */ Tcl_Interp *interp) /* not used */ { unsigned char *data, header[10]; |
︙ | |||
822 823 824 825 826 827 828 | 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 | - + - + | Tcl_Obj *format, /* format object, or NULL */ Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, /* the image to write this data into */ int destX, int destY, /* The rectangular region of the */ int width, int height, /* image to copy */ int srcX, int srcY) { MFile handle, *hdlPtr = &handle; |
︙ | |||
913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 | - + | int number, unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4]) { int i; unsigned char rgb[3]; for (i = 0; i < number; ++i) { |
︙ | |||
979 980 981 982 983 984 985 | 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 | - + - + | GetDataBlock( GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr, Tcl_Channel chan, unsigned char *buf) { unsigned char count; |
︙ | |||
1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 | 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 | - + | int codeSize, clearCode, inCode, endCode, oldCode, maxCode; int code, firstCode, v; /* * Initialize the decoder */ |
︙ | |||
1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 | 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 | - - - + + + - + - + - + - + - - - - - - - - - - - + + - + + - + - - + + + + + - - - + + + + | } if (oldCode == -1) { /* * Last pass reset the decoder, so the first code we see * must be a singleton. Seed the stack with it, and set up * the old/first code pointers for insertion into the |
︙ | |||
1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 | 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 | - + | *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ static void mInit( unsigned char *string, /* string containing initial mmencoded data */ MFile *handle, /* mmdecode "file" handle */ |
︙ | |||
1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 | 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 | - + - - + + | * * Side effects: * The base64 handle will change state. * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ |
︙ | |||
1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 | 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 | - + - - + + - + + - + - + | * a base64 encoded string. * * Results: - same as POSIX fread() or Tcl Tcl_Read() * *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */ |
︙ | |||
1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 | 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 | - + - + - + - + | if (result == TCL_OK) { Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr); } Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr); return result; } |
︙ |
Added generic/tkImgListFormat.c.